Trane Air Conditioner SCXG SVX01B EN User Manual

Installation, Operation, &  
Maintenance  
TM  
IntelliPak  
Commercial Self-Contained  
Modular Series, 20-35 tons  
“JO” and later design sequence  
Models:  
SCWG -020, -025, -030, -032, -035  
SIWG -020, -025, -030, -032, -035  
SCRG -020, -025, -030, -032  
SIRG -020, -025, -030, -032  
March 2008  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Cross reference to related publications/information:  
• Product Catalog, PKG-PRC003-EN, Modular Series Commercial Self-Contained  
• IntelliPakSelf-Contained Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01B-EN  
• Remote Air-Cool-Condenser Installation, Owner, and Diagnostic Manual, CXRC-  
SVX01B-EN  
Installation …………………………........…....…6  
general information …………………………………………6  
pre-installation considerations… …………………………11  
dimensions & weights ………………………………...…19  
mechanical specifications …………………………………30  
electrical requirements ……………………………………33  
pre-startup requirements …………………………………35  
programming ………………………………….……………57  
startup …………………………………………………….…67  
Operation ………………………………………70  
general information ………………………………………70  
sequence of operation ………………………………….…84  
Maintenance ……………………………………91  
maintenance procedures ………………………………92  
troubleshooting ………………………………………..…105  
diagnostics ………………………………………………..106  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and  
Benefits  
Service Equipment and Procedures  
To minimize refrigerant emissions while  
recovering refrigerant, use the  
manufacturers recommended recycling  
equipment per the MSDS. Use  
equipment and methods which will pull  
the lowest possible system vacuum while  
recovering and condensing refrigerant.  
Equipment capable of pulling a vacuum of  
less than 1,000 microns of mercury is  
recommended.  
contain moisture. Reference proper  
refrigerant charge requirements in the  
maintenance section of this manual to  
ensure efficient machine operation.  
When charging is complete, purge or  
drain charging lines into an approved  
refrigerant container. Seal all used  
refrigerant containers with approved  
closure devices to prevent unused  
refrigerant from escaping to the atmo-  
sphere.Take extra care to properly  
maintain all service equipment directly  
supporting refrigerant service work such  
as gauges, hoses, vacuum pumps, and  
recycling equipment .  
Refrigerant Handling  
Procedures  
Environmental Accountability Policy  
Trane urges that all HVAC servicers to  
make every effort to eliminate, if possible,  
or vigorously reduce the emission of CFC,  
HCFC, and HFC refrigerants to the  
atmosphere. Always act in a responsible  
manner to conserve refrigerants for  
continued usage even when acceptable  
alternatives are available.  
Do not open the unit to the atmosphere  
for service work until refrigerant is fully  
removed/recovered. When leak-testing  
with trace refrigerant and nitrogen, use  
HCFC-22 (R-22) rather than CFC-12 (R-  
12) or any other fully-halogenated  
refrigerant . Be aware of any new leak  
test methods which may eliminate  
refrigerants as a trace gas. Perform  
evacuation prior to charging with a  
vacuum pump capable of pulling a  
vacuum of 1,000 microns of mercury or  
less. Let the unit stand for 12 hours and  
with the vacuum not rising above 2,500  
microns of mercury.  
Recover and Recycle Refrigerants  
Never release refrigerant to the  
atmosphere! Always recover and/or  
recycle refrigerant for reuse,  
reprocessing (reclaimed), or properly  
dispose if removing from equipment.  
Always determine the recycle or reclaim  
requirements of the refrigerant before  
beginning the recovery procedure.  
Obtain a chemical analysis of the  
refrigerant if necessary. Questions about  
recovered refrigerant and acceptable  
refrigerant quality standards are  
addressed in ARI Standard 700.  
When cleaning system components or  
parts, avoid using CFC-11 (R-11) or CFC-  
113 (R-113). Use only cleaning-solvents  
that do not have ozone depletion factors.  
Properly dispose of used materials.  
Refrigeration system cleanup methods  
using filters and driers are preferred.  
Keep abreast of unit enhancements,  
conversion refrigerants, compatible  
parts, and manufacturers recommenda-  
tions that will reduce refrigerant emis-  
sions and increase equipment operating  
efficiencies.  
Refrigerant Handling and Safety  
Consult the manufacturers material  
safety data sheet (MSDS) for information  
on refrigerant handling to fully  
A rise above 2,500 microns of mercury  
indicates a leak test is required to locate  
and repair any leaks. A leak test is  
required on any repaired area.  
understand health, safety, storage,  
handling, and disposal requirements. Use  
the approved containment vessels and  
refer to appropriate safety standards.  
Comply with all applicable transportation  
standards when shipping refrigerant  
containers.  
Charge refrigerant into the equipment  
only after equipment does not leak or  
4
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and  
Benefits  
Modular Series Self-Contained  
Unit Components  
The water-cooled condensers are shell  
and tube type with an internal subcooler.  
Condensers are available as mechani-  
cally or chemically cleanable.The  
evaporator fan is double width, double  
inlet and forward curved with a fixed  
pitch belt drive assembly. Frequency  
drives or inlet guide vanes are optional.  
Motor options include open drip proof,  
high efficiency,TEFC, or mill and chem  
spec.  
refrigerant connections to the air cooled  
condensing unit. Also, air-cooled units  
have two refrigerant circuits.Water-  
cooled units have four refrigerant circuits;  
which include a filter drier, pressure relief  
valve, liquid line service valve, sight glass/  
moisture indicator, thermal expansion  
valve with a sensing bulb and external  
equalizing line, discharge line shrader  
valve, a suction line shrader valve, and  
high and low pressure cutout switches.  
Water-cooled units also include a liquid  
line service valve for each circuit.  
Commercial self contained units are  
complete HVAC systems used in floor-by-  
floor applications. Units are easy to install  
because they feature a single point  
power connection, factory installed and  
tested controls, single water point  
connection, factory installed options, and  
an internally trapped drain connection.  
Modular self-contained units can ship as  
split-apart units for installation ease. Split-  
apart units ship with a dry nitrogen  
charge and require field refrigerant  
charging.  
All water-cooled units ship with a full  
refrigerant and oil charge. Air-cooled  
units ship with oil and a dry nitrogen  
holding charge and require field-piping  
For more detailed information, see the  
Owners section of this manual.  
Units consist of multiple compressors,  
water-cooled condensers (water-cooled  
units only), an evaporator coil, dual  
forward curved fans, and control panel.  
Air-cooled units require a remote air-  
cooled condenser, model CXRC.The  
hermetically sealed 3-D scroll  
compressor motors utilize internal motor  
protection and time delays to prevent  
excessive cycling. Unit controls are either  
an electromechanical thermostat or  
microprocessor controls on the IntelliPak  
unit. See Figure I-GI-1 for a typical unit.  
The hermetically sealed 3-D scroll  
compressor motors utilize internal motor  
protection and time delays to prevent  
excessive cycling.  
Figure I-GI-1. IntelliPak® commercial self-contained Modular Series unit.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Installation  
Control Options  
system network.  
Units may be ordered with either  
conventional thermostat interface or  
These modules perform specific unit  
functions using proportional/integral  
control algorithms.They are mounted in  
the unit control panel and are factory  
wired to their respective internal compo-  
nents. Each module receives and  
interprets information from other unit  
modules, sensors, remote panels, and  
customer binary contacts to satisfy the  
applicable request; i.e., economizing,  
mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation.  
See the Operation section of this manual  
for a detailed description of each  
TM  
IntelliPak Direct Digital Control (DDC).  
TM  
IntelliPak controls include a Human  
Interface (HI) panel with two line by forty  
(40) character clear English display for  
easy operator interface to unit setup and  
control parameters. All basic setup  
parameters are preset from the factory.  
Human Interface Panel  
The HI is unit mounted and accessible  
without opening the units front panel. It  
allows easy setpoint adjustment using  
the HI keypad. In addition, the HI displays  
all unit operating parameters and  
conditions in a clear language display,  
which can be configured for either  
English, French, or Spanish.  
modules function.  
Optional Controls  
Optional controls include a disconnect  
switch, dirty filter switch, water flow  
switch (water-cooled only), supply air  
temperature reset, or external setpoint  
inputs. Daytime heating is available on  
units with electric, steam, or hot water  
heat control options. Morning warmup  
operation is available on all units.  
The optional remote human interface  
(RHI) will control up to four self-contained  
units, each containing an interprocessor  
communications bridge (IPCB). It has all  
the same features as the unit-mounted HI  
except for the service mode.  
The static pressure probe, zone night  
heat/morning warmup, supply air  
temperature reset sensor options ship  
separate inside the unit control panel for  
field installation. For more detailed  
information on the unit control options,  
see the Owners section of this manual.  
For more information on setpoint defaults  
and ranges and unit programming, see  
the IntelliPak Self-Contained Program-  
ming Guide, PKG-SVP01B-EN. A copy  
ships with each unit.  
TM  
IntelliPak DDC Control  
TM  
IntelliPak DDC Control provides “smart”  
Unit Nameplate  
unit control with safety features and  
control relays for pumps, dampers, etc.  
The Modular Series IntelliPak self-  
contained unit is controlled by a  
The unit nameplate identifies the unit  
model number, appropriate service  
literature, and wiring diagram numbers. It  
is mounted on the left end of the unit  
control panel.  
microelectronic control system that  
consists of a network of modules.These  
modules are referred to as unit control  
modules (UCM). In this manual, the  
acronym UCM refers to the entire control  
6
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model  
Number  
Description  
SCWG  
Model Number Description  
Each IntelliPak self-contained unit has a multiple character model number unique to that unit.To determine a units specific options,  
reference the model number on the unit nameplate using the model number explanation below.  
S C W G N 20 4 2 JO A B 2 10  
085  
B
A 1 0 1 0 A A C F A 1 1 0 T 2 0  
1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36  
Digit 1 - Unit Model  
110 = 1100 rpm  
115 = 1150 rpm  
120 = 1200 rpm  
125 = 1250 rpm  
130 = 1300 rpm  
135 = 1350 rpm  
140 = 1400 rpm  
145 = 1450 rpm  
150 = 1500 rpm  
155 = 1550 rpm  
160 = 1600 rpm  
165 = 1650 rpm  
170 = 1700 rpm  
175 = 1750 rpm  
180 = 1800 rpm  
185 = 1850 rpm  
E = Vertical Discharge, Ship Separate  
F = Vertical Discharge w/ DoubleWall,  
Ship Separate  
G = Horizontal Discharge, Ship Separate  
H = Horizontal Discharge w/ Double  
Wall, Ship Separate  
S = Self Contained  
Digit 2 - UnitType  
C = Commercial  
I
= Industrial  
Digit 3 - Condenser Medium  
W = Water-Cooled  
R = Remote Air-Cooled  
Digit 13 - PlenumType  
B = Std Plenum w/ Factory Cut Holes  
C = Low Plenum w/ Factory Cut Holes  
E = Std Plenum w/ Field Cut Holes  
F = Low Plenum w/ Field Cut Holes  
H = Std Plenum Double Wall (Perf)  
w/ Field Cut Holes  
Digit 4 - Development Sequence  
G = Modular Series  
Digit 5 - Refrigerant Circuit Configuration  
N = Independent, R-22 Refrigerant  
R = Independent, 407C Refigerant  
J = Low Plenum Double Wall (Perf)  
w/ Field Cut Holes  
L = Std. Plenum w/Factory Cut Holes,  
Ship Separate  
M = Low Plenum with Factory Cut  
Holes, Ship Separate  
P = Std Plenum w/ Field Cut Holes, Ship  
Separate  
R = Low Plenum w/ Field Cut Holes,  
Ship Separate  
U = Std Plenum Double Wall (Perf) w/  
Field Cut Holes, Ship Separate  
V = Low Plenum Double Wall (Perf) w/  
Field Cut Holes, Ship Separate  
0 = Without Plenum  
Digit 6, 7 - Unit Nominal Capacity  
20 = 20Tons (Water or Air Cooled)  
25 = 25Tons (Water or Air Cooled)  
30 = 30Tons (Water Cooled Only)  
32 = 32Tons (Air Cooled Only)  
35 = 35Tons (Water Cooled Only)  
Digit 20 - HeatingType  
A = Steam Coil, LH  
B = Hot Water Coil, LH  
C = Electric Heat, 1 Stage  
F = Hydronic Heat Ctrl Interface  
G = Elec. Heat Ctrl Interface, 1 stage  
K = Steam Coil Ship Separate, LH  
L = Hot Water Coil Ship Separate, LH  
M = Steam Coil, RH  
Digit 8 - UnitVoltage  
6 = 200Volt/60 Hz/3 ph  
4 = 460Volt/60 Hz/3 ph  
5 = 575Volt/60 Hz/3 ph  
N = Hot Water Coil, RH  
Digit 9 -AirVolume/Temp Control  
1 = I-Pak & IGV and Supply AirTemp  
Ctrl  
2 = I-Pak & VFD and Supply Air  
Temp Ctrl  
3 = I-Pak & VFD w/ Bypass and  
Supply AirTemp Ctrl  
4 = I-Pak w/oVol. CTRL, w/ ZoneTemp  
Cool  
5 = I-Pak w/oVol. CTRL, w/ ZoneTemp  
Heat/Cool  
6 = I-Pak w/oVol. CTRL, w/ Supply Air  
Temp Ctrl  
8 = Thermostat Interface  
P = Steam Coil Ship Separate, RH  
R = HotWater Coil Ship Separate, RH  
T = Hi-cap. hot water coil, LH  
U = Hi-cap, hot water coil LH,  
Ship Seperate  
Digit 14 - MotorType  
1 = Std. Efficiency ODP  
2 = Premium Eff. ODP  
V = Hi-cap. hot water coil, RH  
W = Hi-cap. hot water coil, RH,  
Ship Seperate  
3 = Std. EfficiencyTotally Enclosed  
Digit 15, 16 - Motor HP  
05 = 5 HP Motor  
07 = 7.5 HP Motor  
10 = 10 HP Motor  
15 = 15 HP Motor  
20 = 20 HP Motor  
25 = 25 HP Motor  
0 = None  
Digit 21 - Unit Isolators  
A = Isopads  
B = Spring Isolators  
0 = None  
Digit 10, 11 - Design Sequence  
JO= “J” Design  
Digit 17, 18, 19 - Fan RPM  
085 = 850 rpm  
090 = 900 rpm  
095 = 950 rpm  
100 = 1000 rpm  
105 = 1050 rpm  
Digit 12 - Unit Construction  
A = Vertical Discharge  
B = Vertical Discharge with DoubleWall  
C = Horizontal Discharge  
D = Horizontal Discharge w/ Double  
Wall  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model  
Number  
Description  
SCWG  
Digit 22 - Unit Finish  
Digit 28 -Ventilation Control  
B = Airside Econ w/TraqDamper  
(Top O/A Inlet)  
Digit 32 - Miscellaneous System Control  
1 = Timeclock  
1 = Paint - Executive Beige  
2 = Protective Coating  
2 = Interface for Remote HI  
3 = Dirty Filter Switch  
4 = 1 and 2  
3 = Protective Coating w/ Finish Coat  
C = Airside Econ w/ Standard  
Dampers (Top O/A Inlet)  
Digit 23  
0 = None  
E = Airside Econ w/TraqDamper and  
Comparative Enthalpy  
5 = 1 and 3  
6 = 2 and 3  
Digit 24 - Unit Connection  
1 = Disconnect Switch  
2 = Terminal Block  
(Top O/A Inlet)  
7 = 1, 2, and 3  
F = Airside Econ w/ Std Dampers and  
Comparative Enthalpy (Top O/A  
Inlet)  
0 = None  
Digit 33 - Control Interface Options  
A = Generic BAS Module (GBAS)  
B = Ventilation Override Module (VOM)  
D = Remote Human Interface (RHI)  
G = GBAS andVOM  
H = GBAS and RHI  
J = VOM and RHI  
M = GBAS,VOM, and RHI  
0 = None  
1 = Tracer/LCI-I (COMM5) interface  
module  
2 = Tracer/LCI-I and GBAS  
3 = Tracer/LCI-I andVOM  
4 = Tracer/LCI-I and RHI  
5 = Tracer/LCI-I, GBAS andVOM  
6 = Tracer/LCI-I, GBAS and RHI  
7 = Tracer/LCI-I,VOM and RHI  
8 = Tracer/LCI-I, GBAS,VOM and RHI  
3 = Dual Point Power  
G = Traq DamperVentilation Interface  
H = Ventilation For 2 Pos. Cntrl Interface  
0 = None  
Digit 25 - Industrial Options  
A = Protective Coated Evaporator Coil  
B = Silver Solder  
C = Stainless Steel Screws  
D = A and B  
Digit 29 -Water Piping  
A = Right Hand Condenser Connection  
B = Left Hand Condenser Connection  
C = Right Hand Basic Piping  
D = Left Hand Basic Piping  
E = Right Hand Intermediate Piping  
F = Left Hand Intermediate Piping  
J = Right Hand Basic w/ Flow Switch  
K = Left Hand Basic w/ Flow Switch  
L = Right Hand Intermediate  
w/ Flow Switch  
E = A and C  
F = B and C  
G = A, B and C  
0 = None  
Digit 26 - Drain PanType  
A = Galvanized Sloped  
B = Stainless Steel Sloped  
Digit 27 -Waterside Economizer  
A = Mechanical Clean Full Cap. (4-row)  
B = Mechanical Clean Low Cap. (2-row)  
C = Chemical Clean Full Cap. (4-row)  
D = Chemical Clean Low Cap. (2-row)  
E = Mechanical Clean Full Capacity  
(4-row) Ship Separate  
F = Mechanical Clean Low Capacity  
(2-row) Ship Separate  
G = Chemical Clean Full Capacity  
(4-row) Ship Separate  
M = Left Hand Intermediate  
w/ Flow Switch  
0 = None  
Digit 34 - Agency  
T = UL Agency Listing  
0 = None  
Digit 30 - CondenserTubeType  
A = Standard CondenserTubes  
B = 90/10 CuNi CondenserTubes  
0 = None  
Digit 35 - FilterType  
1 = 2-inch ConstructionThrowaway  
2 = 2-inch Med Eff. Throwaway  
Digit 31 - Compressor ServiceValves  
1 = With Service Valves  
0 = None  
Digit 36 - Miscellaneous Control Option  
A = Low Entering AirTemp. Protect  
Device (LEATPD)  
H = Chemical Clean Low Capacity  
(2-row) Ship Separate  
0 = None  
B = High DuctTempT-Stat  
C = Plenum High Static Switch  
D = Kit for Heat Mode Output (w/tstat)  
E = A and B  
F = A and C  
G = B and C  
H = A, B, and C  
0 = None  
8
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model  
Number  
Description  
PSWG  
Self-Contained Ship-WithAccessory Model Number Description  
P
1
S
2
W
3
G
4
S
5
A
6
1
7
1
8
0
9
JO  
10 11  
Digit 1 - Parts/Accessories  
P = Parts/Accessories  
Digit 7 - Mixed AirTemperature Protec-  
tion Kit (field installed)  
1 = Mixed AirTemperature Protection Kit  
0 = None  
Digit 2 - Unit Model  
S= Self-Contained  
Digit 8 - Carbon Dioxide Sensor (field  
installed)  
1 = Carbon Dioxide Sensor Kit  
0 = None  
Digit 3 - Shipment  
W = With Unit  
Digit 4 - Development Sequence  
F = Signature Series  
G = Modular Series  
Digit 9 - Future Option  
0 = None  
Digit 5 - Sensors and Other Accessories  
S = Sensors  
Digit 10, 11 - Design Sequence  
J0 = J Design  
Digit 6 - Sensors and Thermostats (field  
installed)  
A = BAYSENS077 - ZoneTemp Only (CV  
andVAV)  
B = BAYSENS073 - ZoneTemp with  
Timed Override Button (CV andVAV)  
C = BAYSENS074 - ZoneTemp with  
Timed Override Button, Setpoint Dial  
(CV andVAV)  
D = BAYSENS023 - Remote Min. Position  
Potentiometer Control (OA Damper)  
E = BAYSENS108 - CV Zone Sensor-dual  
setpoint, man/auto changeover  
F = BAYSENS110 - CV Zone Sensor-dual  
setpoint, man/auto changeover w,  
indicator lights  
G = BAYSENS019 - CV Programmable  
Night Setback Sensor  
H = BAYSENS021 -VAV Zone Sensor with  
Indicator Lights  
J = BAYSENS020 -VAV Programmable  
Night Setback Sensor  
K = Remote Sensor Kit  
L = Outside AirTemperature Sensor Kit  
M = Outside Air Humidity Sensor Kit  
N = BAYSTAT010 - 2 Heat/2 Cool  
Thermostat  
P = BAYSTAT037A - 2 Heat/2 Cool  
ProgrammableThermostat  
0 = None  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model  
Number  
Description  
PSWG  
After-ShipmentAccessory Model Number  
P S A G W N 20 4 **  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40  
0 0 0  
1
10  
0
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0  
0
L
1
0 0 7 0 0  
0
0
41 42 43 44 45  
Digit 21 - Sensors andThermostats  
A = BAYSENS077 - ZoneTemp Only (CV  
andVAV)  
B = BAYSENS073 - ZoneTemp with  
Timed Override Button (CV andVAV)  
C = BAYSENS074 - ZoneTemp with  
Timed Override Button, Setpoint Dial  
(CV andVAV)  
E = BAYSENS108 - CV Zone Sensor-dual  
setpoint, man/auto changeover  
F = BAYSENS110 - CV Zone Sensor-dual  
setpoint, man/auto changeover w,  
indicator lights  
G = BAYSENS019 - CV Programmable  
Night Setback Sensor  
H = BAYSENS021 -VAV Zone Sensor  
with Indicator Lights  
J = BAYSENS020 -VAV Programmable  
Night Setback Sensor  
K = Remote Sensor Kit  
L = Outside AirTemperature Sensor Kit  
M = Outside Air Humidity Sensor Kit  
0 = None  
Digit 1 - Parts/Accessories  
Digit 13, 14 - Motor HP  
05 = 5 HP Motor  
P = Parts/Accessories  
07 = 7.5 HP Motor  
Digit 2 - Unit Model  
S= Self-Contained  
10 = 10 HP Motor  
15 = 15 HP Motor  
Digit 3 - Shipment  
A = After Unit  
20 = 20 HP Motor  
25 = 25 HP Motor  
30 = 30 HP Motor  
Digit 4 - Development Sequence  
F = Signature Series  
G = Modular Series  
40 = 40 HP Motor  
50 = 50 HP Motor (460V & 575V Only)  
0 = Not Defined  
Digit 5 - Condenser Medium  
W = Water Cooled  
R = remote Air Cooled  
Digit 15 - Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy  
Module (Field Installed)  
1 = ECEM Kit  
Digit 6 - Refrigerant Circuit Configuration  
N = Independent (Water-Cooled)  
M = Manifolded (Air-Cooled)  
0 = None  
Digit 16 - Generic BAS Module  
1 = GBAS 0-5 VDC Kit  
0 = None  
Digits 7, 8 - Unit Nominal Capacity  
20 = 20Tons (Water or Air)  
22 = 22Tons (Water Only)  
25 = 25Tons (Water or Air)  
29 = 29Tons (Water or Air)  
30 = 30Tons (Air Only)  
Digit 17 - Heat Module  
1 = Electric Heat Module Kit  
2 = Hydronic Heat Module Kit  
0 = None  
Digit 22 - Low Entering AirTemperature  
Protection Device  
1 = Low Entering AirTemperature  
Protection Device Kit  
0 = None  
32 = 32Tons (Water Only)  
35 = 35Tons (Water or Air)  
38 = 38Tons (Water Only)  
40 = 40Tons (Air Only)  
42 = 42Tons (Water Only)  
46 = 46Tons (Water Only)  
50 = 50Tons (Air Only)  
52 = 52Tons (Water Only)  
58 = 58Tons (Water Only)  
60 = 60Tons (Air Only)  
65 = 65Tons (Water Only)  
72 = 72Tons (Water Only)  
80 = 80Tons (Water Only)  
Digit 18 - Remote Human Interface and  
IPCB  
1 = Remote Human Interface Panel Kit  
(RHI Only)  
2 = Interprocessor Communications  
Module Kit (IPCB Only)  
3 = RHI and IPCB Kit  
Digit 23 - High DuctTemperature  
Thermostat  
1 = High DuctTemp.Thermostat Kit  
0 = None  
0 = None  
Digit 19 - LonTalk Communications  
Interface Kit (LCI)  
2 =Tracer/LCI-I Comm Interface Kit  
0 = None  
Digit 24 - Plenum High Static Switch  
1 = Plenum High Static Switch Kit  
0 = None  
Digit 20 -Ventilation Override Module Kit  
Digits 25 — 45 - Future Use  
0 = None  
Digit 9 - UnitVoltage  
6 = 200Volt/60 Hz/3 ph  
4 = 460Volt/60 Hz/3 ph  
5 = 575Volt/60 Hz/3 ph  
0 = Not Defined  
(VOM)  
1 = VOM Kit  
0 = None  
Digits 10, 11 - Design Sequence  
** = Factory Assigned  
Digit 12 - Unit Power Connection  
1 = Single Point Power  
2 = Dual Point Power  
0 = Not Defined  
10  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-installation  
considerations  
Installation  
Receiving and Handling  
Shipping Package  
Commercial self-contained units ship  
assembled with protective coverings  
over the coil and discharge openings.  
Figure I-PC-1 illustrates a typical shipping  
package.  
Ship-Separate Accessories  
Field-installed sensors ship separately  
inside the units main control panel. Extra  
filters, sheaves, and belts ship in the units  
fan motor section. Condenser plugs,  
spring isolators, and isopads ship in the  
units bottom left side.  
Receiving Checklist  
Complete the following checklist  
immediately after receiving unit  
shipment to detect possible shipping  
damage.  
Inspect individual cartons before  
accepting. Check for rattles, bent carton  
corners, or other visible indications of  
shipping damage.  
If a unit appears damaged, inspect it  
immediately before accepting the  
shipment. Make specific notations  
concerning the damage on the freight  
bill. Do not refuse delivery.  
Inspect the unit for concealed damage  
before it is stored and as soon as  
possible after delivery. Report  
concealed damage to the freight line  
within the allotted time after delivery.  
Check with the carrier for their allotted  
time to submit a claim.  
Do not move damaged material from  
the receiving location. It is the receivers  
responsibility to provide reasonable  
evidence that concealed damage did  
not occur after delivery.  
Figure I-PC-1. Typical unit mounted on shipping skid.  
Do not continue unpacking the  
shipment if it appears damaged. Retain  
all internal packing, cartons, and crate.  
Take photos of damaged material if  
possible.  
Notify the carriers terminal of the  
damage immediately by phone and  
mail. Request an immediate joint  
inspection of the damage by the carrier  
and consignee.  
Notify yourTrane representative of  
the damage and arrange for repair.  
Have the carrier inspect the damage  
before making any repairs to the unit.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-installation  
considerations  
Installation  
Installation Preparation  
Before installing the unit, perform  
the following procedures to  
ensure proper unit operation.  
5. Remove the protective shipping covers  
from the unit. Refer to the “Unit  
Protective Covers” section on page 35.  
Note: Unit height and connection locations  
will change if external vibration isolators are  
used. The unit may be raised an additional  
5-7/8 inches with spring-type isolators.  
1.Verify the floor or foundation is level.  
Shim or repair as necessary.To ensure  
proper unit operation, install the unit  
level (zero tolerance) in both horizontal  
axis. Failure to level the unit properly  
can result in condensate management  
problems, such as standing water  
inside the unit. Standing water and wet  
surfaces inside units can result in  
microbial growth (mold) in the drain  
pan that may cause unpleasant odors  
and serious health-related indoor air  
quality problem.  
Note: Unit height and connection locations  
will change if the unit is constructed to be  
split-a-part in the field. See unit submittal  
drawings for connection locations.  
6. Electrical supply power must meet  
specific balance and voltage  
requirements, as described in the  
“Electrical Requirements” section on  
page 33.  
2. Allow minimum recommended  
clearances for maintenance and  
routine service. See “Service Access”  
section on page 13.  
7. Water-cooled units only (model  
SCWG): The installer must furnish and  
install a condenser main and standby  
water pump, cooling tower, pressure  
gauges and all components for the  
waterside piping. See the “Water  
Piping” section on page 30 for general  
waterside recommendations.  
3. Position the unit and skid assembly in  
its final location. If unit shipped split-  
apart, follow the procedure in the  
“Split-Apart Unit Assembly” section  
on page 16 before completing this  
step.Test lift the unit to determine exact  
unit balance and stability before  
hoisting it to the installation location.  
See Figure I-PC-7 and I-PC-8 on page 15  
for typical rigging procedures,  
8. Air-cooled units only (model SCRG):  
These units require field-installation of a  
remote air-cooled condenser and  
refrigerant piping. See the “Refrigerant  
Piping” section on page 32 for general  
piping recommendations.  
including cautions and proper uses of  
such equipment as fork lifts, spreader  
bars, and hooks.  
4. Remove the skids from under the unit.  
See the “Rigging and Handling”  
section on page 14. Refer to the “Skid  
Removal” section on page 18. If you  
find internal damage, file a claim  
immediately to the delivering carrier.  
12  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-installation  
considerations  
Installation  
ServiceAccess  
Variable Frequency Drives are shipped  
separately and field installed. See page 29  
forVFD related dimensions and weights.  
ƽWARNING  
96” (2132 mm)  
HazardousVoltage w/Capacitors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
TopView  
CCRC/CIRC 20, 29, 32  
48” (1066 mm)  
48” (1066 mm)  
Control  
Panel  
96” (2132 mm)  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
Table I-PC-1. Service and code clearance requirements  
Side  
front  
left  
Distance  
42 in. (20-38 tons)  
18 in.  
36 in.  
77 in.  
Purpose  
NEC code requirement  
air-cooled units only  
refrigeration & waterside component service  
fan shaft removal  
provides uniform airflow  
provides uniform airflow  
See Figure I-PC-2 andTable I-PC-1 for  
recommended service and code  
clearances. Access to thermostat unit  
controls is through a hinged access panel  
door on the front, lower left of the unit’s  
compressor section.  
right  
inlet  
36 in.  
18 in.  
IntelliPak unit controls access is through  
a panel on the middle right of the fan  
section. The panel is secured with an  
automatic latch and quick-acting fasten-  
ers, which require a screwdriver to open.  
18” minimum  
air inlet  
Removable front unit panels provide  
access to compressors, fan, motor, inlet  
guide-vane actuator, and belts.  
Removable left side panels give access to  
drive side, fan bearing, inlet guide-vanes,  
condensers, and waterside economizer  
control valve.The compressor, con-  
denser and fan motor access panels are  
secured with quick-acting fasteners.  
Access panels for evaporator coils,  
expansion and water valves, and left fan  
bearing are sheet metal screws. Access  
to other components for service requires  
removal of panels secured with sheet  
metal screws. During operation, sight  
glasses are viewable through portholes  
on the upper right side panel of the fan  
section.  
36”minimum  
See table  
Control  
Panel  
42” minimum  
Figure I-PC-2.Top view of self-contained unit showing recommended service and code clear-  
ances  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-installation  
considerations  
Installation  
Rigging and Unit Handling  
ƽWARNING  
Improper Unit Lift!  
Test lift unit approximately 24 inches to  
verify proper center of gravity lift point.  
To avoid dropping of unit, reposition  
lifting point if unit is not level. Failure to  
properly lift unit could result in death or  
serious injury or possible equipment or  
property-only damage.  
ƽWARNING  
Lifting Equipment Capacity!  
Ensure lifting equipment capacity  
exceeds unit weight by an adequate  
safety factor to prevent injury, death, or  
unit damage.  
Figure I-PC-5.Assembled unit gravity block location.  
Table I-PC-2. Gravity Block Dimensions  
Before lifting the unit or modular  
component, determine the approximate  
center of gravity for lifting safety. See  
Figure I-PC-5 for assembled modular  
units and Figure I -PC-6 for split-apart  
units. The center of gravity may vary  
slightly within the gravity block  
Model  
A
B
C
D
SCWG  
36  
14  
38  
12  
SCRG  
36  
16  
40  
12  
Fan Section Only  
depending on unit options.  
Always test-lift the unit to determine the  
exact unit balance and stability before  
hoisting it to the installation location. See  
Figures I-PC-7 and I-PC-8 for typical  
rigging procedures and proper rigging  
equipment usage.  
Compressor Section Only  
Figure I-PC-6. Split-apart unit gravity block location.  
14  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-installation  
considerations  
Installation  
Unit Handling Procedure  
NOTICE  
Do not use hooks to lift unit or hook into  
open channels to lift unit. This could  
cause unit damage.  
1. Position rigging sling under wood  
shipping skid.  
2. Use spreader bars to avoid unit  
damage.  
3. When using a forklift, exercise caution  
to prevent unit damage.  
4. Use the standard fork length to lift one  
end and drag or pull unit while skidding  
the opposite end.  
5. The unit center of gravity will fall within  
center of gravity block at various  
locations depending on unit options.  
6. Use hooks to lift fan section only. Do not  
hook into open channels to lift unit.  
7. See unit nameplate for unit weight.  
8. Do not stack units.  
Figure I-PC-7.Assembled modular unit proper rigging.  
Figure I-PC-8. Split-apart modular unit proper rigging.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-installation  
considerations  
Installation  
Split-Apart Unit Assembly  
1. Ensure the tagging information on the  
fan section nameplate matches that on  
the compressor nameplate.  
2. Remove the connector brackets  
holding the the sheet metal shipping  
cover on compressor section. Retain  
brackets and screws.  
3. Remove shipping cover from the  
compressor section and verify the ship-  
with packge contains:  
12. Insulate discharge and suction lines  
with the insulation provided.  
13. Remove panel FLR and open the  
bottom control panel door, FLL. Pull the  
fan motor leads (coiled in the fan  
section) through the knockout in the  
bottom of the fan section to the control  
panel. Ensure that the bushing is  
installed in the hole to prevent the  
wires from chafing. Refer to the unit  
wiring diagrams to connect the fan  
motor leads properly and ensure  
correct phase sequencing.  
• suction and discharge line couplings  
• insulation  
• sheet metal screws  
4. Lift fan section onto the compressor  
section using the rigging method in  
Figure I-PC-8 on page 13.  
5. Remove skid from the fan section,  
placing the fan section onto the  
compressor section. Reference Figure I-  
PC-9.  
6. Install the connection brackets with the  
sheet metal screws (referenced in step  
2) on all sides of the unit. Reference  
Detail “A” in Figure I-PC-9.  
IntelliPak Units(UCM) Only  
14. Remove panels FML, FMM, and FMR.  
15. Pull the circular plug connector (CPC)  
from the compressor section through  
the knockouts into the fan section.  
Install the bushings (provided on the  
wiring harnesses) in the knockouts.  
16. Using the CPC wiring diagram,  
connect the male CPC to the female  
CPC in the top control panel.  
17. If the unit has the mixed air  
7. Remove the unit panels labeled RU and  
RL in Figure I-PC-10 on page 17. To  
remove panels, first remove the four  
shipping screws located in the corner of  
each panel. Next, turn the remaining 1/4  
turn fasteners to the unlatch position.  
The panel is supported by a “lip”  
channel. So, lift the panel up and off the  
unit to remove it. See Detail “A”in  
Figure I-PC-9.  
8. Connect the drain hose to the drainpan  
outlet fitting and secure it with the drain  
hose clamp provided.  
9. Circulate nitrogen thoughout  
refrigerant circuits.  
temperature option, route the capillary  
tube on back of the filter rack.  
Units with Thermostat Only  
18. Remove panel FMR. See Note 1 on  
Figure I-PC-10.  
19. Pull frost protection wires from the  
bottom control panel throughknockouts  
in bottom of fan section. Route wires to  
the appropriate frost protection  
switches on the evaporator coil.  
Reference the unit wiring diagrams to  
connect frost protection wiring  
connectors.  
10. Unbraze and remove the caps on the  
discharge and suction lines in both the  
compressor and fan sections.  
11. Install and braze discharge and  
suction line couplings.  
Air-Cooled Units Only:  
20. Route the refrigerant circuit wires for  
circuits 1 and 2 from the bottom control  
panel through the knockouts to the  
solenoid valves. The solenoid valves  
are located in the liquid refrigerant  
lines on the right-hand side of the unit.  
Refer to the unit wiring diagrams to  
make splice connections.  
16  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-installation  
considerations  
Installation  
Figure I-PC-9 How to assemble the split apart modular unit  
Figure I-PC-10 Modular unit panel description and internal connections  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-installation  
considerations  
Installation  
view of Figure I-PC-9, must be 1/4 - 1/  
inches.To increase the clearance, li2ft  
the unit off the isolator and turn the  
leveling bolt counterclockwise. Recheck  
the unit level and the housing  
clearances. Maximum allowable  
difference between isolator heights is 1/4  
inch. Shim as required under the  
isolators.  
Allow three fan diameters above the  
unit for the discharge ductwork. Return  
air enters the rear of the unit and  
conditioned supply air discharges  
through the top.  
Electrical connection knockouts are on  
the top, left side of the unit.  
Allow adequate space for piping  
access and panel removal. Condenser  
water piping, refrigerant piping, and  
condensate drain connections are on  
the lower left end panel.  
Skid Removal  
The unit ships on skids to provide forklift  
locations from the front or rear.The skid  
allows easy maneuverability of the unit  
during storage and transportation.  
Remove the skids before placing the unit  
in its permanent location.  
Remove the skids using a forklift or jack.  
Lift one end of the unit off of the skids.  
See Figure I-PC-5 and I-PC-6 for unit  
gravity block location. Slide the skids out  
and lower the unit at the installation  
location.  
Note: The compressors and fan assembly  
are internally isolated on most units. Due to  
this, the addition of external isolation  
devices (spring mounting isolators) is at  
the discretion of the building or HVAC  
system designer.  
Note: Unit height and connection locations  
will change if using vibration isolators. The  
unit height may increase up to 5 7/8” with  
spring type isolators.  
Note: External isolation is not necessary  
since units are internally isolated. Consult a  
vibration specialist before “double-  
isolating” the unit.  
Electrical supply power must meet  
specific balance and voltage  
requirements as described in the  
Pre-Installation Checklist  
Complete the following checklist before  
beginning unit installation.  
External Unit Isolation  
“Electrical Requirements” section.  
Water-cooled units only: The installer  
is responsible for providing a condenser  
main, standby water pump, cooling  
tower, pressure gauges, strainers, and  
all components for waterside piping.  
See the “Water Piping” section for  
general waterside recommendations.  
Air-cooled units only: The installer is  
responsible for providing and installing  
the remote air-cooled condenser and  
refrigerant piping, including filter driers.  
Verify the unit size and tagging with the  
unit nameplate.  
Make certain the floor or foundation is  
level, solid, and sufficient to support the  
unit and accessory weights. Level or  
repair the floor before positioning the  
unit if neccesary.  
Allow minimum recommended  
clearances for routine maintenance and  
service. Refer to unit submittals for  
dimensions.  
If your job requires external vibration  
isolation, two options are available:  
isopads or spring-type isolators. Isopads  
should be placed under the unit at  
locations indicated on the factory-  
provided isolator sheet.  
Set the spring-type isolators (Figure I-PC-  
9) in position after the unit is removed  
from skids before making electrical,  
piping, or duct connections. All units  
require a minimum of four isolators per  
unit. But some may require six isolators,  
depending upon unit options.  
Note: Trane strongly recommends you  
consult a vibration specialist before  
double-isolating the unit. Double isolation  
is not recommended.  
If you decide to externally isolate the unit,  
use spring-flex, type CP isolators. The  
spring number is marked on the outer  
housing. See Figure I-PC-9.  
To install external isolators, complete the  
following procedure.  
1. Locate the isolators under unit base at  
the locations indicated on the factory-  
provided isolator placement sheet. Lift  
one end of the unit at a time to position  
isolators to the floor, using anchor bolts.  
2. Level the unit by adjusting isolator  
heights. Unit weight may cause the  
upper housing to rest on the lower  
housing of the spring isolators. The  
isolator clearance shown in the side  
Figure I-PC-9. Optional spring isolator dimensional data.  
18  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions & SCWG  
Weights SIRG  
SCWG/SIWG Dimensions, in.  
front view  
left-side view  
factory-piped units  
left-side view  
direct condenser connections  
SCWG/SIWG weight, lbs.  
unit tons  
20  
base weight  
2260  
25  
2730  
30  
2864  
35  
3000  
Notes:  
1. All unit weights include refrigerant, water, inlet guide  
vanes and controllers, electric heat and valves.  
2. Add 150 lbs. to total weight to obtain approximate  
shipping weight.  
3. Split-apart unit weights are approximately: 60% total  
unit weight = compressor section, 40% total unit weight  
= fan section.  
top view  
back view  
right-side view  
factory-piped units  
right-side view  
direct-condenser connections  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions & SCRG /  
Weights SIRG  
SCRG/SIRG Dimensions, in.  
front view  
left-side view  
right-side view  
top view  
SCRG/SIRGWeight, lbs.  
unit tons  
20  
25  
base weight  
2344  
2479  
2614  
32  
Notes:  
1. All unit weights include refrigerant, water, inlet guide  
vanes and controllers, electric heat and valves.  
2. Add 150 lbs. to total weight to obtain approximate  
shipping weight.  
3. Split-apart unit weights are approximately: 60% total  
unit weight = compressor section, 40% total unit weight  
= fan section.  
back view  
20  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
SCRG/SIRG/SCWG/SIWG Detail A”  
Electrical Connections, in.  
Detail “B” Discharge Options , in.  
front view  
shown with horizontal discharge option  
top view  
shown with vertical discharge option  
Detail Dimensions, in.  
model  
A
20  
B
C
D
E
F
3
1
1
1
1
SCWG/SCRG 20  
SCWG/SCRG 25  
SCWG 30 - 35/SCRG 32  
11 1/2  
10 /4 58 /2 5 /8  
13 /4 11 /2  
13 /4 11 /2  
1
1
5
1
1
1
19 /4 12 /4 57 /8 5 /8  
5
1
1
18  
14  
/
56 /2 5 1/8  
13 /4  
8
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CCRC /  
CIRC  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
CCRC/CIRC Air-Cooled Condenser  
OPTIONAL LOW  
AMBIENT DAMPER  
ONE DAMPER PER  
RCUIT)  
REFRIGERANT  
LINE  
CONNECTIONS  
FRONTAL VIEW  
AC  
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT 2  
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT 1  
OPTIONAL LOW  
AMBIENT DAMPER  
24VOLTWIRE ENTRY HOLE SIZED  
3
4
FOR / ” CONDUIT  
115VOLTWIRE ENTRY HOLE SIZED FOR  
3
4
/ ” CONDUIT  
SUPPLYVOLTAGEWIRE ENTRY HOLE  
SIZED FOR 1” CONDUIT  
(LIQUID LINE CONNECTION REFRIG. CIRCUIT 1)  
(HOT GAS CONNECTION REFRIG. CIRCUIT 1)  
(LIQUID LINE CONNECTION REFRIG. CIRCUIT 2)  
(HOT GAS CONNECTION REFRIG. CIRCUIT 2)  
B
C
CCRC/CIRC Air-cooled condenser dimensions & weight, in-lbs.  
shipping  
weight  
2030  
2084  
2138  
operating  
weight  
1906  
1960  
2014  
model  
AA  
AB  
88  
88  
88  
AC  
88  
88  
88  
1
CCRC/CIRC Electrical connections, in.  
CCRC/CIRC 20  
CCRC/CIRC 29  
CCRC/CIRC 32  
70  
/
8
1
1
70  
/
8
model  
A
B
C
1
CCRC/CIRC 20-32  
4 1/2  
10 1/2 17 /2  
70  
/
8
CCRC/CIRC Refrigerant connections, in.  
model  
CCRC/CIRC 20-32  
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
7
3
1
3
5
5
66 /8 14 /8 18 /2 24 /4 29  
/
8
1 1/8  
/
8
1 1/8  
22  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
HotWater Coil  
Hot water coil dimensions & weight, in-lbs.  
unit size  
20 - 35 tons  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
5 /8  
J
7 /4  
weight  
460  
1
3
5
1
7
1
1
5
3
37 /4 53 /4 16 /8 73 /2 14 /8 16 /4 43 /4  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
Steam Coil  
Steam coil dimensions, in-lbs.  
unit size  
A
B
C
D
E
K
L
M
N
1
P
41  
Q
9 3/8  
R
4 3/8  
weight  
460  
1
3
5
1
1
7
20 - 35 tons 37 /4 53 /4 16 /8 73 /2 10 7/8 22 /2 3 3/8 15 /8  
24  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
Electric Heat Coil  
Electric heat coil dimensions & weight, in-lbs.  
unit size  
20 tons  
25 tons  
A
B
C
D
weight  
460  
460  
1
7
1
70 /4  
4 /8  
4 1/8  
2 7/8  
11 /2  
11 1/2  
11 1/2  
19  
19  
19  
1
70 /4  
1
30 - 35 tons  
70 /4  
460  
Note: Coil box height is 8 in.  
Flexible Horizontal Discharge  
Plenum  
Flexible horizontal discharge plenum dimensions & weights, in-lbs.  
20-35 tons  
low height  
standard height  
A
35  
B
17 /  
35  
C
weight  
262  
1
1
4
2
86 /  
1
1
4
2
25 /  
86 /  
352  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
Waterside Economizer  
Waterside economizer weight, in-lbs.  
weight  
unit size  
20 - 35 tons  
2-row 4-row  
488 584  
26  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
Airside  
Economizer  
Airside Economizer  
Airside economizer dimensions & weight, in-lbs.  
unit size  
A
36  
B
65 /8  
C
D
E
F (1) F (2) G (1) G (2) H (1) H (2)  
J
K
L
M
weight  
5
1
1
1
3
1
1
5
1
1
3
SCWG/SIWG 20, 25  
SCRG/SIRG 20  
SCWG/SIWG 30, 35  
SCRG/SIRG 25, 32  
37 74 /4 6 /8 56 /2 49 /4 23 /4 20 /2 5 /8  
7
20 /2 17 /8  
12 49 /4 273  
36  
65 /8  
37 74 1/4 6 1/8 61 /8 62 /4 28 /8 20 /2 3 1/4  
7
20 /2 17 /8  
5 1/2 62 /4 273  
5
3
3
1
1
1
1
3
Detail A”  
Detail “B”  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
VFD  
Mounting Requirements  
Variable Frequency Drive  
Option (VFD)  
There must be a minimum eight inch  
clearance above and below theVFD. A  
minimum two inch clearance is required  
on each side.  
Proper location of theVFD is important to  
achieve proper performance and normal  
operating life. Installation must be in an  
area where it will be protected from:  
• Direct sunlight, rain or moisture.  
• Corrosive gases or liquids.  
Also, allow enough clearance for opening  
theVFD cabinet door.This will ensure  
sufficient air space for cooling.  
ƽWARNING  
Control and LineVoltage!  
Vibration, airborne dust, or metallic  
particles.  
Control and line voltage wiring from the  
VFD to the unit must be in accordance  
with all local and National Electric Codes.  
Do not touch circuit components until  
main power has been turned off and  
“charge” lamp is extinguished.The  
capacitors are still charged and could  
Refer to the “Dimensions andWeights”  
section beginning on page 19 forVFD  
dimensions and weights.  
For effective cooling as well as proper  
maintenance, install theVFD vertically to  
the ground using four mounting screws.  
result in death or serious injury.  
ƽWARNING  
A
HazardousVoltage w/Capacitors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
B
G
F
C
D
E
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
VFD dimensions, in.  
NOTICE  
Use Copper Conductors Only!  
voltage  
460  
hp  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
7.5  
10  
15.55  
15.12  
7.87  
8.66  
0.39  
0.24 7.87  
Unit terminals are not designed to  
accept other types of conductors. Failure  
to use copper conductors may result in  
equipment damage.  
208  
460  
7.5  
10  
15  
20  
25  
22.05  
21.26  
7.87  
9.53  
0.83  
0.30 10.24  
208  
460  
15  
20  
30  
40  
27.56  
26.77  
10.63  
12.13  
0.83  
0.30 11.05  
0.30 11.65  
The variable frequency drive (VFD) option  
can only be used with IntelliPak units.The  
VFD andVFD w/bypass is available from  
5 to 25 hp and is aTraneTR1. AllVFDs are  
pre-configured and run tested at the  
factory prior to shipping.TheVFD is wall  
mounted.  
208  
460  
30  
50  
60  
31.50  
31.49  
30.71  
30.71  
10.63  
10.63  
12.13  
14.57  
0.75  
1.97  
208  
40  
-
13.19  
28  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions &  
Weights  
VFD  
Electrical Installation Procedure  
Variable Frequency Drive with Bypass  
Refer to the National Electric Code,  
section 310-16 for sizing wires 4B - 9B. All  
other control wires should be twisted  
shielded or twisted pair shielded, 20 - 14  
AWG, with lead length not to exceed 164  
feet. When using shielded wire, the shield  
sheath must be connected at the VFD  
only.The connection on units withVFD is  
J13-S.The connection on unis withVFD/  
bypass is ITBI-10.  
C
A
B
F
D
E
G
H
VFD with bypass dimensions, in.  
voltage  
460  
hp  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
7.5  
10  
30.40  
28.03  
16.14  
23.35  
24.85  
0.75 8.59 10.63  
208  
7.5  
10  
15  
20  
15  
20  
25  
41.28  
38.89  
16.14  
24.00  
25.5  
0.75 10.95 12.99  
460  
208  
25  
50.81  
48.35  
21.36  
31.61  
33.41  
0.90 12.36 14.41  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical  
Specifications  
Duct Connections  
Water Piping  
Note:The compressors and fan assembly are  
internally isolated.Therefore, external isolation  
devices (spring mounting isolators) are at the  
discretion of a vibration specialist consulted  
by the building or HVAC system designer.  
ƽWARNING  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
High PressureWater!  
Provide relief valves on system water  
piping to prevent instantaneous release  
of high pressure water. Failure to provide  
relief valves could result in death or  
serious injury or water pump damage or  
unit failure.  
Run the ductwork straight from the  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
opening for a minimum of three fan  
diameters. See Figure I-MR-1. Extend  
remaining ductwork as far as possible  
without changing size or direction. Do not  
make abrupt turns or transitions near the  
unit due to increased noise and excessive  
static losses. Use elbows with splitters or  
turning vanes to minimize static losses.  
Condenser Connections  
Condenser water piping knockouts are in  
the lower left end panel. If necessary,  
remove insulation to gain access. All field  
installed piping must conform to  
Poorly constructed turning vanes may  
cause airflow generated noise. Align the  
fan outlet properly with the ductwork to  
decrease noise levels in the duct and to  
increase fan performance. To complete  
trunk ductwork to theVAV terminal units,  
refer to theVAV box manuals for specific  
requirements. Check total external static  
pressures against fan characteristics to  
be sure the required airflow is available  
throughout the ductwork.  
applicable local, state, and federal codes.  
To complete condenser water  
connections follow the procedure below.  
Note: Four condenser waterline drain plugs  
ship in a bag in the units left end. The  
installer must field install these four plugs  
using pipe thread sealer. An additional plug  
is provided for units with a waterside  
economizer.  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
To achieve maximum acoustical perfor-  
mance, minimize the duct static pressure  
setpoint.  
Return air enters the rear of the unit and  
conditioned supply air discharges through  
the top. Attach supply air ductwork  
directly to the units top panel, around the  
fan discharge opening. A duct collar is not  
provided.  
1. Attach the water supply line to the inlet  
connection, and the return line to the  
outlet connection. Entering and leaving  
water connections for all condensers  
are factory manifolded and require only  
single connections for entering and  
leaving water. If the unit has a  
waterside economizer and/or control  
valves, the factory pipes between these  
components.  
2. If using a cooling tower, refer to Figure  
I-MR-2 for a typical piping circuit from  
the unit.  
3. Ensure the water pressure to the unit  
does not exceed 400 psig.  
Note: Units equipped with the flexible  
horizontal discharge plenum option may  
include a duct collar when holes are factory  
cut. If discharge openings are field-cut, refer  
to the “Plenum Installation” section.  
Discharge  
Duct  
3 Fan  
Diameters  
3-inch  
Flexible  
Duct  
Install all air ducts according to the  
National Fire Protection Association  
standards for the “Installation of Air  
Conditioning andVentilation Systems  
other than ResidenceType (NFPA 90A)  
and ResidenceTypeWarm Air Heating  
and Air Conditioning Systems (NFPA  
90B).  
Return  
Air  
Note: To prevent water pump damage,  
design system piping to provide relief  
when using energy saving waterside  
economizer valves.  
Make duct connections to the unit with a  
flexible material such as heavy canvas. If  
a fire hazard exists,Trane recommends  
using Flexweave 1000, type FW30 or  
equivalent canvas. Use three inches for  
the return duct and three inches for the  
discharge duct. Keep the material loose to  
absorb fan vibration.  
Figure I-MR-1. Duct connection recommenda-  
tions  
30  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical  
Specifications  
Condensate Drain Connections  
Waterside PipingArrangements  
Install a condenser water pump between  
the cooling tower (either open or closed)  
and the self-contained unit. Lay out the  
remainder of the systems condenser  
piping in reverse returns.This helps  
balance the system by equalizing the  
length of supply and return pipes.  
Multistory buildings may use a direct  
return system with balancing valves at  
each floor.  
Note: Unit does not have floor drains.  
The condensate drain is internally  
trapped. Condensate drain connections  
are on the units left side. Connect  
condensate drain piping to the 1 1/4“ NPT  
female fitting, using at least 7/8” OD  
copper or 3/4“ OD iron pipe. Pitch the  
condensate line downward a minimum  
WaterTemperature Requirements  
Do not allow the entering water  
temperature to go below 54°F (12.2°C) on  
units with constant water flow (basic  
piping). This will cause the compressors  
to shut down and the mechanical cooling  
function will lockout. However, the  
economizer (if enabled) will continue to  
function.The compressors will reset  
when the entering water temperature  
reaches 58°F (15°C).  
1
of /2” for each 10' of horizontal run, away  
from the unit. Be sure to install the  
condensate drain “P” trap drain plug.  
Before starting the unit, fill the trap with  
water to prevent negative pressure in the  
fan section from impeding condensate  
flow.To facilitate drain pipe cleaning,  
install plugged tees in place of  
Install the supply riser and its return in  
close proximity. Furnish both with  
permanent thermometers to check the  
waterside balance during start-up and  
routine maintenance checks.  
Units with variable water flow  
(intremediate piping) have a modulating  
condensing pressure control valve that  
allows compressor operation down to  
entering water temperatures of 35°F  
(2°C).  
90°elbows.  
Also, include strainers at each pump inlet  
and unit. Install drain valves at the risers  
base to allow drainage points for system  
flushing during start-up and routine  
maintenance. For condenser draining  
and header removal, include a shutoff/  
balancing valve on the entering and  
leaving waterside pipes, drain tees, and  
unions of each unit. Also, install a shutoff  
valve on the unit entering water pipe for  
condenser draining.  
General Waterside Recommendations:  
Cooling Towers  
Cooling tower control affects the unit  
cycle rates. Condenser water  
temperature swings from 10-15°F may  
cause excessive compressor, water  
valve, and unit cycling. Be sure to set the  
tower controls to minimize compressor/  
unit cycling.  
For more information on constant and  
variable water flow, see the Sequence of  
Operation section of this manual.  
Note: Units with a waterside economizer  
can be set from the human interface panel  
for variable or constant water flow.  
Table I-MR-1. Water Connection Sizes.  
Unit Size  
SCWG 20-35  
Direct Condenser  
1-1/2 NPT  
Factory Piped  
2-1/2 NPT  
Figure I-MR-2. Condenser water piping components for cooling tower system  
Figure I-MR-3. Direct condenser connections.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical  
Specifications  
Refrigerant Piping (Air-Cooled  
Units Only)  
See the “Startup” section of this manual  
for instructions on refrigerant evacuation,  
charging, and superheat measurement.  
Leak-test the entire refrigeration system  
after all piping is complete.  
1.When heating copper in the presence  
of air, copper oxide forms.To prevent  
copper oxide from forming inside the  
tubing during brazing, sweep an inert  
gas, such as dry nitrogen, through the  
tubing. A nitrogen flow of 6 to 10 cubic  
feet per hour is sufficient to displace the  
air in the tubing and prevent oxidation  
of the interior surfaces. Use a pressure  
regulating valve or flow meter to  
control the flow.  
2. Ensure that the tubing surfaces  
requiring brazing are clean, and that the  
tube ends are carefully reamed to  
remove any burrs.  
3. Make sure the inner and outer tubes of  
the joint are symmetrical and have a  
close clearance, providing an easy ‘slip’  
fit. If the joint is too loose, the  
connections tensile strength is  
significantly reduced. Ensure the  
overlap distance is equal to the inner  
tube diameter.  
4. Wrap each refrigerant line component  
with a wet cloth to keep it cool during  
brazing. Excessive heat can damage  
the internal components.  
5. If using flux, apply it sparingly to the  
joint. Excess flux will contaminate the  
refrigerant system.  
6. Apply heat evenly over the length and  
circumference of the joint.  
7. Begin brazing when the joint is hot  
enough to melt the brazing rod. The hot  
copper tubing, not the flame, should  
melt the rod.  
8. Continue to apply heat evenly around  
the joint circumference until the brazing  
material is drawn into the joint by  
capillary action, making a mechanically  
sound and gas-tight connection.  
9. Visually inspect the connection after  
brazing to locate any pinholes or  
crevices in the joint. Use a mirror if joint  
locations are difficult to see.  
LeakTest (RemoteAir-cooled Units Only)  
Units ship with a holding charge of dry  
nitrogen. Before installing the unit  
refrigerant piping, momentarily depress  
either the suction or discharge line access  
valve to verify the holding charge has not  
been lost. If no nitrogen escapes the  
access valve, leak-test the entire  
refrigerant system to determine the leak  
source. Use a halogen leak detector, a  
halide torch, or soap bubbles to leak test.  
After finding a leak, remove the test  
pressure and repair the leak. Retest the  
unit to ensure all leaks are repaired.  
Brazing Procedures  
Proper brazing techniques are essential  
when installing refrigerant piping. The  
following factors should be kept in mind  
when forming sweat connections:  
ƽWARNING  
Hazard of Explosion and Deadly  
Gases  
Never solder, braze or weld on refriger-  
ant lines or any unit components that are  
above atmospheric pressure or where  
refrigerant may be present.Always  
remove refrigerant by following the  
guidelines established by the EPA Federal  
CleanAirAct or other state or local  
codes as appropriate.After refrigerant  
removal, use dry nitrogen to bring  
system back to atmospheric pressure  
before opening system for repairs.  
Mixtures of refrigerants and air under  
pressure may become combustible in  
the presence of an ignition source  
leading to an explosion. Excessive heat  
from soldering, brazing or welding with  
refrigerant vapors present can form  
highly toxic gases and extremely  
10. ReferenceTables M-MP-6 and M-MP-  
7 for the correct amount of refrigerant  
required for charging the unit.  
corrosive acids. Failure to follow all  
proper safe refrigerant handling practices  
could result in death or serious injury.  
32  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical  
Requirements  
requirements.  
Control Power  
UnitWiring Diagrams  
Bring supply wiring through the knockout  
in the lower left side of the unit control  
panel. Connect the three phase wires to  
the power terminal block or the non-  
fused disconnect switch in the control box  
terminals. Refer to specific wiring  
diagrams and fuse information in the  
units control panel.  
NOTICE  
Component Failures!  
ƽWARNING  
Live Electrical Components!  
Unit transformers IT1, IT3, 1T4, and IT5  
are sized to provide power to the unit  
only. Do not use these transformers to  
supply power to field equipment. Field  
connections to these transformers may  
create immediate or premature compo-  
nent failures.  
During installation, testing, servicing and  
troubleshooting of this product, it may be  
necessary to work with live electrical  
components. Have a qualified licensed  
electrician or other individual who has  
been properly trained in handling live  
electrical components perform these  
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical  
safety precautions when exposed to live  
electrical components could result in  
death or serious injury.  
NOTICE  
Use Copper Conductors Only!  
Unit terminals are not designed to  
accept other type conductors. Failure to  
use copper conductors may result in  
equipment damage.  
In this example, 2.2% imbalance is not  
acceptable.Whenever a voltage  
imbalance of more than 2.0% exists,  
check the voltage at the unit disconnect  
switch. If the imbalance at the unit  
disconnect switch does not exceed 2.0%,  
faulty unit wiring is causing the  
Specific unit wiring diagrams are  
provided on the inside of the control  
panel door. Use these diagrams for  
connections or trouble analysis.  
NOTICE  
Equipment Damage!  
imbalance. Conduct a thorough  
inspection of the unit electrical wiring  
connections to locate the fault, and make  
any repairs necessary.  
Correct phase sequence is critical. If  
phase sequence of the incoming line  
voltage is not correct, it may result in  
motor damage.  
Supply PowerWiring  
Access the connection terminal block  
through the control panel on the units  
upper left side. All wiring should conform  
to NEC and applicable local code require-  
ments.  
ƽWARNING  
Voltage Range  
HazardousVoltage w/Capacitors!  
Voltages must be within +- 10% the  
nameplate voltage. Ensure the unit  
voltage is balanced by measuring at the  
compressor terminals.Voltage imbalance  
on three phase systems can cause motor  
overheating and premature failure.  
Maximum allowable imbalance is 2.0%.  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
Be sure all wiring connections are secure.  
Reference the unit specific diagrams  
inside the control panel.  
Voltage Imbalance  
Read the voltage at the compressor  
terminals to determine if it is balanced.  
Voltage imbalance on three phase  
systems can cause motor overheating  
and premature failure.The maximum  
allowable imbalance is 2.0%.Voltage  
imbalance is defined as 100 times the  
sum of the deviation of the three voltages  
from the average (without regard to sign)  
divided by the average voltage. For  
example, if the three measured voltages  
are 221, 230, and 227, the average voltage  
would be:  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
(221 + 230 + 227) = 226 volts  
It is the installers responsibility to  
provide power supply wiring to the unit  
terminal block or the non-fused  
3
The percentage of voltage imbalance is  
then:  
disconnect switch option.Wiring should  
conform to NEC and all applicable code  
100 * (226-221) = 2.2%  
226  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical  
Requirements  
Selection Procedures  
Table ED-1. Number of Compressors per Unit  
RLA = rated load amps  
SCWG/SIWG 20  
SCRG/SIRG 20  
25  
30  
25  
1
35  
32  
-
Compressor LRA = locked rotor amps  
Fan motor LRA = locked rotor amps,  
N.E.C. table 430 - 150  
10HP  
2
-
2
-
15HP  
1
2
FLA = full load amps, N.E.C.  
Table 430 - 150  
Table ED-2. SCWG/SIWG Compressor Motor Data  
200V  
460V  
575V  
575V  
Voltage utilization range is 10%  
HP  
10  
15  
RLA  
33.1  
46.9  
LRA  
269  
409  
RLA  
14.4  
20.4  
LRA  
117  
178  
RLA  
11.5  
16.4  
LRA  
94  
143  
Determination of minimum circuit  
ampacity (MCA).  
MCA = 1.25 x largest motor amps/VFD  
amps (FLA or RLA) + the sum of the  
remaining motor amps.  
Table ED-3. SCRG/SIRG Compressor Motor Data  
200V  
460V  
Determination of maximum fuse size  
(MFS) and maximum circuit breaker size  
(MCB).  
MFS and MCB = 2.25 x largest motor  
amps (FLA or RLA) + the sum of the  
remaining motor amps.  
HP  
10  
15  
RLA  
38.4  
55.0  
LRA  
269  
409  
RLA  
16.7  
24.1  
LRA  
117  
178  
RLA  
13.4  
19.1  
LRA  
94  
143  
Table ED-4. Fan without VFD  
For units with the dual power option,  
there are two electrical circuits that need  
calculations using the formulas above:  
circuit #1 - fans  
200V  
460V  
575V  
HP  
5
FLA  
LRA  
FLA  
LRA  
FLA  
5.4  
8.2  
11.4  
16.2  
20.0  
24.2  
LRA  
16.1  
25.0  
32.9  
44.8  
61.0  
74.0  
105  
152  
193  
290  
373  
469  
6.7  
10.8  
14.2  
20.3  
25.0  
31.0  
46  
37  
7.5  
10  
15  
20  
25  
66  
54  
84  
66  
126  
162  
204  
102  
132  
162  
circuit #2 - compressors  
If the rating value determined does not  
equal a standard current rating of over  
current protective device, use the next  
lower standard rating for the marked  
maximum rating.  
Table ED-5. Fan with VFD  
200V  
460V  
HP  
7.5  
10  
15  
20  
25  
FLA  
LRA  
FLA  
10.6  
14.2  
21.0  
27.6  
34.0  
LRA  
66  
84  
126  
162  
204  
13.8  
32.2  
48.3  
61.9  
78.2  
152  
193  
290  
373  
469  
Note:Values are at the maximumVFD input rating and not the reduced motor values.  
Table ED-6. Electric Heat - Single Stage  
SCWG/SIWG  
SCRG/SIRG  
Heat  
Kw  
16  
20  
24  
26  
200V  
Amps  
44.8  
55.6  
66.8  
72.4  
78  
460V  
Amps  
19.6  
24.2  
29.0  
31.6  
Size  
20  
25  
30  
-
Size  
20  
25  
-
32  
-
35  
28  
34.0  
Note: Electric heat amperage should not be considered when determining minimum circuit ampacity.The current of the  
unit in the heating mode will not exceed the current of the unit in the cooling mode.  
Table ED-7. CCRC/CIRC Condenser Electrical Data  
Unit Size  
Tons  
20, 29, 32  
Rated  
Voltage  
200  
MFS/  
MCB  
20  
# Fans  
FLA (ea.)  
4.1  
LRA (ea.)  
20.7  
MCA  
17.4  
17.4  
7.7  
4
4
4
4
230  
4.1  
20.7  
20  
460  
575  
1.8  
1.4  
9.0  
7.2  
15  
15  
6.0  
Note: All motors for CCRC/CIRC units are rated at 1 hp (.7457 kW).  
34  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Pre-Startup Procedures  
Supply Fan Isolators  
Unit Protective Covers  
Remove the shipping channels and  
mounting bolts from beneath the fan. See  
Figure I-PR-1. Open both fan  
Remove the shipping protection  
coverings from the human interface  
panel (HI) at the control panel, the filter  
box (or air inlet opening), the discharge  
air opening, and optional variable  
frequency drive (VFD).  
ƽWARNING  
compartment access doors to access the  
channels. There are four mounting points  
for 20-38 ton units and six mounting  
points for 40-80 ton units. See Fig I-PR-2.  
HazardousVoltage w/Capacitors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
Compressor Isolators  
Loosen compressor isolator mounting  
bolts and remove shipping bracket from  
beneath the compressor feet. Retighten  
isolator mounting bolts.Torque to 18 ft.  
lbs. (+ 2 ft. Lbs.)  
Note: For 20-38 ton units, do not remove the  
fan assembly shipping blocks and tie down  
bolts if the fan speed is 750 rpm or less.  
While keeping the fan mounting frame  
level, turn the fan isolator height adjusting  
bolts until the fan housing P-gasket  
compresses 1/4” against the roof transi-  
tion piece. See Figure I-PR-1.  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
Before starting up units perform the  
following procedures to ensure proper  
unit operation.  
Figure I-PR-1. Supply fan horizontal isolation  
shipping bracket.  
Figure I-PR-2. Fan isolator locations.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Plenum BottomView  
Dashed line indicates correct insulation placement.  
Figure I-PR-3. Correct plenum insulation placement  
Plenum  
Before installing the plenum attach the  
insulation strip that ships with the plenum.  
See Figure I-PR-3 for proper insulation  
location. Align the plenum front with the  
control panel side of the unit. Using the  
strips and screws provided, secure the  
plenum to the unit.  
Treat field-cut holes to prevent fiberglass  
from entering the airstream.  
Note: Plenum insulation must be applied  
properly to prevent air bypass around the  
plenum. See Figure I-PR-3.  
36  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Airside Economizer  
Installation  
Note: Airside economizer option available on  
20-80 tons only.  
Unit Handling  
1. Hoist the damper cabinet to the  
installation location with straps  
positioned under the skid as shown in  
Figure I-PR-4. Use spreader bars to  
prevent unit damage during lifting.  
2. With the damper cabinet at its final  
location (near the unit), remove the  
screws securing it to the skid from the  
side flanges. Retain these screws for  
later use.  
Figure I-PR-4. Proper lifting of the airside economizer  
Unit Preparation  
3. The support legs are secured to the  
skid, and the hanging bracket is secured  
with wire ties to an inside flange near  
the cabinet’s base. Remove the C-  
channel collar and install it on the unit, if  
not already installed.  
o’clock, and secure it with screws  
provided. See Figure I-PR-5.  
10. Lift the damper cabinet and position it  
such that the hanging bracket is  
positioned over the units C-channel  
collar.  
11. Lower the damper cabinet until the  
holes in its side flanges are aligned with  
the holes in the C-channel collar. Install  
screws removed in step 3 through the  
damper cabinets side flanges and into  
the C-channels corresponding holes.  
12. Attach ductwork to the top and back  
dampers according to local codes.  
14. Cabinets with TRAQ dampers only:  
Unroll the two rolls of pneumatic tubing  
located inside the damper cabinet.  
Route these tubes through the cabinet’s  
front upper panel (0.25 dia. holes  
provided). Connect them to the two  
pneumatic tubes protruding from the  
customer electrical connection panel on  
the unit. Be sure to connect like tubes to  
each other (black to black, white stripe  
to white stripe).  
4. Remove the roll of 1/8” thick gasket  
from the damper cabinetsW-supports,  
and apply it to the C-channel collar  
mounted on the rear of the unit. This  
gasket will provide a seal between the  
damper cabinet and the unit.  
15. Cabinets with TRAQ dampers only:  
Locate the “bullet” sensor and rolled up  
wiring in the units filter section. Route it  
into the damper cabinet and insert the  
sensor into the sensor mounting clip  
attached to underside of one of theTraq  
dampers.  
5. Attach the legs (with screws provided)  
to the leg brackets located on the  
dampers base.  
Field Wiring Connections  
6. Attach a field-provided clevis of  
suitable strength ( > 1/2” ), to each of the  
13. Open the damper cabinets door and  
connect the factory-provided plug from  
the actuator to the factory-provided  
plug in the units filter section.  
corner lifting brackets through the  
7
/8” diameter holes.  
7. Attach to the clevises a means of lifting  
the damper cabinet from its skid.  
Unit Installation  
8. Slowly raise the damper cabinet from  
its skid.  
9. Attach the hanging bracket across the  
front of the damper cabinet. Position it  
with its short flange pointing to four  
Airside  
Economizer  
Figure I-PR-5. Proper installation of the airside economizer option  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Static PressureTransducer  
Installation (VAV units only)  
Installing theTransducer  
Complete the following procedure to  
properly install the inlet guide vane static  
pressure transducer.  
Supply air static pressure controls the  
inlet guide vane and inverter options. A  
static pressure head assembly ships  
separate in the control panel for field  
installation in the supply air duct work.  
The installer is responsible for providing  
pneumatic tubing.  
1. Mount the pressure sensing head  
assembly in the duct so that the sensing  
tip is in the middle of the duct so that it  
will provide a proper pressure  
measurement. See Figure I-PR-6.  
2. Connect the pneumatic tubing from the  
sensing head to the push-on tubing  
connection in the control panel. Use a  
plastic static pickup tubing. Do not  
exceed 250 feet for 1/4“ OD tubing or  
500 feet for 3/8” OD tubing.  
Transducer Location  
Place the head assembly in an area of the  
ductwork that will provide an average  
and evenly distributed airflow pattern.  
Use the following guidelines to determine  
an appropriate installation location.  
The transducer inside the control panel  
picks up low side or reference pressure.  
1. Locate the static head assembly about  
2/3 to 3/4 of the way down the longest  
duct run, in an area approximately 10  
duct diameters downstream and 2 duct  
diameters upstream of any major  
interferences, turns, or changes in duct  
diameter.  
Note: If plastic tubing pulls away from a  
connection, trim it back before replacing it  
on the fitting. Stretched tubing may leak  
and cause faulty control.  
2. When installing pneumatic tubing  
between the head assembly and  
transducer in the control panel, do not  
exceed 250 feet for 1/4” OD tubing or  
500 feet for 3/8” OD tubing.  
Figure I-PR-6. Static pressure sensor installation  
38  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Waterside Economizer  
Installation Procedure  
1. Loosen and pull all end devices that go  
throught the bushing on the filter rack  
(upper right corner of rack).  
6. Align economizer holes with the holes  
in the unit channel. Install screws in the  
top (6x) and bottom (6x) of the  
economizer.  
7. Remove the unit’s rear middle panel  
and unbraze the two copper pipes in  
the 2 5/ ” water pipe. Do not remove  
the pip8e outlet blockoff panel.  
8. Remove the economizer tubing  
assemblies from the shipping box.  
Check ship-separate parts against  
those shown in Figures I-PR-8, I-PR-9, I-  
PR-10, and I-PR-11. Face the front of the  
unit to see which side the water pipe  
exits to determine if the unit has either  
right or left-hand piping.  
9. Assemble tubing as shown in Figure I-  
PR-8 or I-PR-11.Tack all tubes in place  
before brazing to ensure proper fit-up.  
For right-hand piped units, install the  
ball valve actuator assembly and  
actuator as shown in Figure I-PR-10.  
Refer to the unit wiring diagram for  
wiring connection points.  
2. Remove the filter rack from the back of  
the unit by removing the 1/4” hex head  
screws from the top and bottom of the  
filter rack assembly.The filter rack  
assembly will hang on the unit when  
the screws are removed. Remove the  
filter rack by lifting it up off the unit.  
3. Remove the economizer from the  
crate and position it behind the unit with  
the headers on the left side, when  
facing the back of the unit. Remove the  
plastic envelope that is taped to the  
economizer box assembly.This  
envelope contains the gasket that must  
be installed onto the vertical side  
flanges of the box.  
4. Install the pressure sensitive gasket to  
the unit side of the vertical flange on  
the economizer box.  
5. Hang the economizer on the unit as  
shown in Figure I-PR-7. Lift the  
economizer by using the holes  
10. Install the pipe insulation on all pipe  
line to prevent sweating  
11. Install the rear panels.  
12. Re-install the filter rack on the back of  
the economizer coil box and affix with  
screws provided.  
provided in the top panel of the  
economizer.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Waterside Economizer with left-hand  
factory piping components  
Figure
Item Part Description  
Waterside Economizer Ship-Separate Parts List  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Assembly #1  
Assembly #2  
Assembly #3  
Assembly #4  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 16 7/8”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 22 5/8  
Factory  
Piping  
Left-Hand  
Item Part #  
Qty.  
Description  
4001  
2
5
1
1
1
Tube; 2 5/8” x 9”  
X17110026250  
4003  
4740  
Elbow; 2 5/8” x 2 5/8”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 26 1/8”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 33 1/2”  
*Tube; 2 5/8” x 14 7/8”  
Figure I-PR-8. Detail view of ship-separate  
tubing assemblies for waterside econo-  
mizer left-hand piping  
4009  
X21040098390  
X21080406110  
X16120203570  
X17150027060  
X17170031210  
4738  
4007  
X45000032020  
4006  
10 ft. *Gasket  
1
1
1
1
1
1
*Insulation; 2 5/8” Rubatex  
Plug; 1 1/2” Brass  
Bushing; 2 1/2” ftg. x 1 1/2”  
Tee; 2 5/8” x 2 1/8” x 2 5/8”  
*Tube; 2 5/8” x 19 3/4”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 14 1/2”  
1 roll Tape, 1.5’ wide  
1
Tube; 2 5/8” x 19 15/16”  
40  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Waterside Economizer with right-hand  
factory piping components  
Waterside Economizer Ship-Separate Parts List  
Factory  
Piping  
Item Part #  
Qty.  
Description  
Right-Hand  
4001  
4607  
X17110026250  
4605  
X15330177010  
4008  
X17170031210  
X16120203570  
X17150027060  
4007  
4031  
4603  
1
Tube; 2 5/8” x 9”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 17”  
1
5
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Elbow; 2 5/8” x 2 5/8”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 9 1/2”  
WaterValve  
*Tube; 2 5/8” x 20 1/4”  
Tee; 2 5/8” x 2 1/8” x 2 5/8”  
Brass Plug, 1 1/2”  
Bushing; 2 1/8” ftg. x 1 1/2”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 14 1/2”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 62  
*Tube; 2 5/8” x 11 3/ ”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 19 1/44”  
*Actuator with wires  
*90 Degree Conduit Fitting  
*1/2” Conduit  
4006  
X13610256010  
X19110028040  
X19110028040  
X210804060110  
X45000032020  
X21040098390  
2
3 ft.  
14 ft.  
1 roll  
10 ft.  
*Rubatex Insulation, 2 5/8”  
Tape, 1.5’ wide  
*Gasket  
Item Part Description  
A
B
C
D
E
Assembly #1  
Assembly #2  
Assembly #3  
Assembly #4  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 11 3/4”  
Tube; 2 5/8” x 20 1/4”  
Actuator Assembly  
F
G
Figure I-PR-10.Waterside economizer with right-hand factory piping tubing assembly.  
Figure I-PR-11. Detail view of ship-separate tubing assemblies for waterside economizer right-hand factory piping.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Hydronic Coil Installation  
mounting screws needed to attach the  
coil box to the unit and the gasket  
required on the vertical side flanges of  
the box.  
3. Install the pressure sensitive gasket to  
the unit side of the vertical flange on the  
coil box in two places.  
These instructions are for steam and hot  
water coil installation. The hydronic coil  
assembly has a full coil, piping, a modu-  
lating temperature control valve, and a  
disc temperature limit device located in  
the unit near the fan on the motor frame.  
Hydronic coils are available with either  
right or left-hand pipe connections. Piping  
connections are identical to the unit  
piping. For example, if you have right-  
hand unit piping, the hydronic coil will  
have right-hand connections. The  
4. Using 2” x 1/2” standard thread  
eyebolts, thread into the coil lift plates  
to raise the coil up to the height  
necessary to attach it to the unit.The top  
panel has a “J” hook on it to allow  
hanging, similar to the filter rack. Align  
the holes so that the coil hangs on the  
unit. If the unit has the dirty filter option,  
connect the static pressure tube to the  
unit before bolting the coil in place.  
Locate the static pressure tubing on the  
unit evaporator coil and route through  
the knockout in the top corner of the  
coil box.  
hydronic coil assembly has temperature  
controls to keep the units internal cabinet  
temperature below 105 F to prevent  
motor and bearing damage.  
Installation Procedure  
5. Align the hydronic coil with the holes in  
the unit channel or waterside  
economizer option. Move the coil box  
up against the unit and install using six  
mounting screws in the top and six in  
the bottom of the coil box.  
6. Remove the valve and pipe cover on  
the coil box. Connect the wires that are  
coiled in the coil box, referring to the  
wiring diagram installed on the unit  
control panel door. Route wires into the  
unit through knockouts in the top of the  
box.  
7. Reinstall the filter rack on the back of  
the heating coil rack. If the unit has the  
waterside economizer option, the filter  
rack will require additional support legs.  
ƽWARNING  
Unit Structural Integrity!  
Unit panels provide structural integrity.  
Do not remove more than two non-  
adjacent panels at one time as this could  
cause the plenum frame to collapse.  
Failure to follow these recommendations  
could result in death, serious injury or  
equipment damage.  
1. Remove filter rack from the back of the  
unit. Remove the 1/4-inch hex head  
screws from the top and bottom of the  
filter rack assembly.The filter rack  
assembly will hang on the unit when  
the screws are removed. The filter rack  
can now be removed by lifting up on  
the filter rack.  
2. Remove the hydronic coil from the  
crate and position it behind the unit with  
the open side facing the unit evaporator  
coil inlet. Also, remove the plastic  
envelope that is taped to the coil box  
assembly.This envelope contains the  
42  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Electric Heat Installation  
vertical discharge unit, position the  
electric heater as shown in Figure I-PR-  
12.  
4. Use the hole pattern in the electric heat  
as a template for marking and drilling  
3/16” diameter holes in the unit.  
5. Bolt the electric heaters to the unit  
using 1/4” sheetmetal screws.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
The electric heat option consists of a  
single stage heater and is used in  
IntelliPak units or units with a field-  
installed thermostat. The electric heater  
ships separate for field installation and  
wiring. Available heater kW per unit size  
is listed inTable I-PR-2. Electric heat can  
be installed on units with a vertical  
discharge. However, it cannot be installed  
on units with plenums. See Figure I-PR-12  
andTable I-PR-3 for electric heat dimen-  
sional data.  
Note: It is very important that electric heaters  
are selected based on unit voltage and  
tonnage because discharge opening sizes vary  
by unit tonnage.  
Electric Heat CoilWiring Procedure  
Table I-PR-2.Available Electric Heat kW  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
Unit Size  
20 Tons  
25 Tons  
30 Tons  
32 Tons  
35 Tons  
Heater kW  
16  
20  
24  
26  
28  
NOTICE  
Use Copper Conductors Only!  
1. Before wiring the electric heater,  
remove the unit wiring diagram from  
the unit control panel and refer to the  
connection points.  
Unit terminals are not designed to  
accept other type conductors. Failure to  
use copper conductors may result in  
equipment damage.  
Installation Procedure  
1. Remove the fan discharge shipping  
covers, if they have not already been  
removed.  
ƽWARNING  
2. Install the open-cell gasket around the  
discharge opening on the heater.  
3. Position the electric heater so that the  
unit fan discharge openings line up with  
the electric heater openings. For a  
HazardousVoltage w/Capacitors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Figure I-PR-12. Electric heater dimensions.  
Table I-PR-3. Electric Heat Dimensions - English - (inches)  
Unit Size  
20 Tons  
25 Tons  
B1  
B2  
15 /8  
15 /8  
15 /8  
Z
27 /4  
26 /4  
23 /4  
5
3
10 3/4  
Figure I-PR-12.Vertical discharge electric heat  
installation.  
1
5
3
12 /4  
14 /4  
3
5
3
30, 32, 35Tons  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Standard with All IntelliPak  
Units  
Zone Sensor Options for IntelliPak Control Units  
Zone sensor options are available and be ordered with the unit or after the unit ships.  
Following is a full description of zone sensors and their functions. Installation  
instructions are on page 34. Programming instructions for the programmable zone  
sensor are on page 36. Refer toTable O-GI-2 on page 61 for the zone sensor  
temperature vs. resistance coefficient curve.  
BAYSENS077* Description  
This zone sensor module ships with all units, and can be used with BAYSENS019,  
BAYSENS020, or BAYSENS021 remote sensors.When this sensor is wired to one of  
these remote zone sensors, wiring must be 18 AWG shielded twisted pair (Belden 8760  
or equivalent). Refer to the specific zone sensor for wiring details. It provides the  
following features and system control functions:  
• Remote temperature sensing in the zone  
• Morning warmup sensor  
• Zone sensor for ICS™ systems  
• Zone temperature averaging  
Figure I-PR-7. BAYSENS077  
zone temperature sensor only  
When used as a remote sensor for standard zone sensor, the thermistor sensor must  
be disabled.  
(Possible Schematic Designation(s): 5U23, 5U26, 5U30, and 5RT5.)  
CV Unit Zone Sensor Options  
BAYSENS108 & BAYSENS110 Description  
These zone sensor modules are for use with cooling/heating constant volume units.  
They have four system switch settings (heat, cool, auto, and off) and two fan settings  
(on and auto).The zone sensor provides either manual or automatic chaneover control  
with dual setpoint capability.  
BAYSENS108 and BAYSENS110 features and system control functions include:  
• System control switch to select heating mode (HEAT), cooling mode (COOL),  
automatic selection of heating or cooling as required (AUTO), or to turn the  
system off (OFF).  
• Fan control switch to select automatic fan operation while actively heating  
or cooling (AUTO), or continuous fan operation (ON).  
• Dual temperature setpoint levers for setting desired temperature. The blue  
lever controls cooling, and the red lever controls heating.  
•Thermometer to indicate temperature in the zone.This indicator is factory  
calibrated.  
Figure I-PR-8. BAYSENS108  
Dual setpoint, manual/automatic  
changeover sensor, accessory model  
number digit 6 = E  
(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U29)  
BAYSENS110-Specific Feature: Function status indicator lights:  
• SYSTEM ON glows continuously during normal operation, or blinks if  
system is in test mode.  
• COOL glows continuously during cooling cycles, or blinks to indicate a  
cooling system failure.  
• HEAT glows continuously during heating cycles, or blinks to indicate a  
heating system failure.  
• SERVICE blinks or glows to indicate a problem. These signals vary  
depending on the particular equipment being used.  
(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U29)  
Figure I-PR-10. BAYSENS110  
Dual setpoint, manual/automatic changeover  
sensor with system function lights, acces-  
sory model number digit 6 = F  
44  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
CV andVAV Unit Zone Sensor Integrated ComfortSystems Sensors for CV andVAV  
Options  
Applications  
These zone sensor options are for use with cooling/heating Integrated Comfort System  
(ICS) systems.  
BAYSENS074 Description  
This electronic analog sensor features single setpoint capability and timed override  
with override cancellation.  
BAYSENS074 features and system control functions include:  
• Remote temperature sensing in the zone  
• A timed override button to move an ICS or a building management system from its  
“unoccupied” to “occupied” mode.  
• Thumbwheel for local setpoint adjustment  
• A cancel button to cancel the “unoccupied override” command.  
Figure I-PR-11. BAYSENS074  
Zone temperature sensor w/timed override  
and local setpoint adjustment,  
(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U23)  
accessory model number digit 6 = C  
BAYSENS073 Description  
This electronic analog sensor features single setpoint capability and timed override  
with override cancellation. It is used with aTrane Integrated Comfort system.  
BAYSENS073 features and system control functions include:  
• Remote temperature sensing in the zone  
• A timed override button to move an ICS or a building management system from its  
“unoccupied” to “occupied” mode.  
• Cancel button to cancel the “unoccupied override” mode.  
(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U23)  
Figure I-PR-12. BAYSENS073  
Zone temperature sensor w/timed override ,  
accessory model number digit 6 = B  
VAV Unit Zone Sensor Option  
BAYSENS021 Description  
This zone sensor module is for use withVAV units without night setback. It allows the  
user to control system operation and monitor unit operating status from a remote  
location.The sensor has a system switch, a S/A temperature setpoint indicator, a local  
sensor, and four LEDs.  
BAYSENS021 features and system control functions include:  
Temperature sensing in the zone  
• System control switch with mode setting for "AUTO" and "OFF"  
• Supply air single temperature setpoint  
• Function status indicator lights:  
“SYS ON” glows continuously during normal operation, or blinks if system is in  
test mode.  
“COOL” glows continuously during cooling cycles, or blinks to indicate a  
cooling system failure.  
“HEAT” glows continuously during heating cycles, or blinks to indicate a  
heating system failure.  
“SERVICE” blinks or glows to indicate a problem. These signals vary  
depending on the particular equipment being used.  
Figure I-PR-9. BAYSENS021  
Single setpoint sensor with system  
function lights, accessory model number  
digit 6 = H  
(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U25)  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
the unit control panel.  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
3. Replace the zone sensor cover back on  
the subbase and snap securely into  
place.  
Standard Remote Sensor (BAYSENS077)  
When using the remote sensor,  
BAYSENS077, mount it in the space that  
is to be controlled.Wire according to the  
interconnecting wiring diagrams on the  
unit.  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
Standard zone sensors, BAYSENS077,  
ships with all units  
Table I-PR-1. Zone sensor maximum lengths  
and wire size  
NOTICE  
Use Copper Conductors Only!  
Distance from  
Unit to Controller  
0-150feet  
Recommended  
Wiring Size  
22gauge  
Zone Sensor Installation  
Unit terminals are not designed to  
accept other types of conductors. Failure  
to use copper conductors may result in  
equipment damage.  
All sensor options ship in the main control  
panel and are field-installed.  
Programmable option installation  
procedures.  
151--240feet  
241-385 feet  
386- 610 feet  
611-970 feet  
20gauge  
18gauge  
16gauge  
14gauge  
Mounting Location  
Mount the sensor on the wall in an area  
with good air circulation at an average  
temperature. Avoid mounting space  
temperature sensor is areas subject to  
the following conditions:  
• Drafts or “dead” spots behind doors or  
in corners  
• Hot or cold air from ducts  
• Radiant heat from the sun or appliances  
• Concealed pipes and chimneys  
• Unheated or non-cooled surfaces  
behind the sensor, such as outside walls  
• Airflows from adjacent zones or other  
units  
Remove the zone sensor cover from  
subbase, and mount subbase on the wall  
or on a 2 x 4 junction box. Route wires  
through the wire access hole in the  
subbase. See Figure I-PR-14. Seal the hole  
in the wall behind the subbase.  
Note: Guidelines for wire sizes and lengths  
are shown in Table I-PR-1. The total resis-  
tance of these low voltage wires must not  
exceed 2.5 ohms per conductor. Any resis-  
tance greater than 2.5 ohms may cause the  
control to malfunction due to excessive  
voltage drop.  
To mount the sensors, remove the dust  
cover and mount the base on a flat  
surface or 2" x 4" junction box. Sensors  
ship with mounting screws.  
Note: Do not run low-voltage control wiring in  
same conduit with high-voltage power wiring.  
Wiring  
Mounting the Subbase  
1. Run wires between the unit control  
panel and the zone sensor subbase.To  
determine the number of wires  
required, refer to the unit wiring  
diagrams.  
2. Connect the wiring to the appropriate  
terminals at the unit control panel and  
at the zone sensor subbase. In general,  
zone sensor connections to the unit use  
the convention of connecting zone  
sensor terminals to like numbered unit  
terminals (1 to 1, 2 to 2, etc.).The  
connection detail is shown on the unit  
wiring diagrams, which are located in  
ƽWARNING  
HazardousVoltage w/Capacitors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
46  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
1-3/32 [27,43 mm]  
3/32 [2,00 mm]  
1-3/8 [35,00 mm]  
19/32 [15,00 mm]  
3-5/32 [80,00 mm]  
1-1/32 [26,16 mm]  
5/32 [3,81 mm] 4X  
15/64 [6,00 mm]  
RIGHT  
BACK  
Figure I-PR-22. Zone sensor mounting hole locations for: BAYSENS077, BAYSENS073, BAYSENS074,  
BAYSENS108, and BAYSENS110.  
Zone sensor mounting hole locations for: BAYSENS021.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Mounting Directly to the Wall  
Mounting to Junction Box  
Junc  
Figure I-PR-23. Typical zone sensor installation for vertically-oriented sensors  
48  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Programmable Zone Sensors  
ConstantVolume Zone Sensor  
VariableAirVolume Zone Sensor  
Programmable zone sensors provide  
programming and zone temperature  
sensing for the self-contained unit. It  
allows the user to monitor room  
temperatures and program settings in  
the space, without having to access the  
unit control panel.  
BAYSENS019 Description  
BAYSENS020B Description  
This seven day programmable sensor  
with night setback has four periods for  
occupied\unoccupied programming per  
day. If power is interrupted, the program  
retains in permanent memory. If power is  
off longer than two hours, only the clock  
and day may have to be reset.  
This seven day programmable sensor  
with night setback has four periods for  
occupied\unoccupied programming per  
day. Either one or all four periods can be  
programmed. If power is interrupted, the  
program retains in permanent memory. If  
power is off longer than twohours, only  
the clock and day may have to be reset.  
Reference programming instructions for  
these zone sensors beginning on page 44.  
The six programming keys on the front of  
the zone sensor allow selection of system  
modes (heat, cool, auto, and off), two fan  
modes (on and auto). The zone sensor  
has dual temperature selection with  
programmable start time capability.  
The occupied cooling setpoint range is 40  
to 80°F.The warmup setpoint range is 50  
to 90°F with a 2° deadband. The  
The zone sensor keypad allows you to  
select occupied/unoccupied periods with  
two temperature inputs (cooling supply  
air temperature and heating warmup  
temperature) per occupied period. The  
occupied cooling setpoint ranges be-  
tween 40 and 80°F.The warmup setpoint  
ranges between 50 and 90°F with a 2°  
deadband. The unoccupied cooling  
setpoint ranges between 45 and 98°F.  
The heating setpoint ranges between 43  
and 96°F.  
unoccupied cooling setpoint range is 45 to  
98°F.The heating setpoint range is 43 to  
96°F.  
Two liquid crystal displays (LCD) display  
zone temperature, setpoints, week day,  
time, and operational mode symbols.  
The liquid crystal display (LCD) displays  
zone temperature, setpoints, week day,  
time, and operational mode symbols.  
The DIP switches on the subbase enable  
or disable applicable functions; i.e.  
morning warmup, economizer minimum  
CFM override during unoccupied status,  
Fahrenheit or Centigrade, supply air  
tempering, remote zone temperature  
sensor, 12/24 hour time display, smart  
fan, and computed recovery.  
The DIP switches on the subbase enable  
or disable applicable functions; i.e.  
morning warmup, economizer minimum  
position override during unoccupied  
status, heat installed, remote zone  
temperature sensor, 12/24 hour time  
display, and daytime warmup. During an  
occupied period, an auxiliary relay rated  
for 1.25 amps @ 30 volts AC with one set  
of single pole double throw contacts  
activates.  
During an occupied period, an auxiliary  
relay rated for 1.25 amps @ 30 volts AC  
with one set of single pole double throw  
contacts activates.  
Figure I-PR-17. BAYSENS020, program-  
mable night-setback sensor,  
accessory model number digit 6 = J  
Figure I-PR-16. BAYSENS019, program-  
mable night setback sensor, accessory  
model number digit 6 = G  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Programmable Zone Sensor  
Installation  
Installation Procedure  
a. Hold the subbase in position and mark  
the three mounting hole locations on  
the wall.  
1. Remove the zone sensor module from  
the subbase. Carefully hold the zone  
sensor module with one hand and  
firmly grasp the subbase with the other.  
See Figure I-PR-20.To remove the zone  
sensor module from the subbase,  
gently pull away and upward.  
b. Drill three 3/16” (4.8 mm) holes. Gently  
tap the plastic wall anchors into the  
holes until the anchor tops are flush  
with the wall.  
Mounting Location  
Mount the sensor on the wall in an area  
with good air circulation at an average  
temperature. Choose a location that is  
easily accessible, and on a wall where the  
subbase can be mounted about 5 feet  
(1.5 meters) above the floor.  
6. Pull the zone sensor module wires  
through the subbase as shown in Figure  
I-PR-21.  
7. Loosely secure subbase to the wall  
with the mounting screws. Do not  
tighten the subbase screws yet.  
8. Level the subbase by sight, then firmly  
tighten the three subbase mounting  
screws.  
Note: The zone sensor module is an  
electronic sensitive device. Do not touch  
printed circuit board, electronic compo-  
nents, or connector pins. Handle plastic  
housing only to prevent damage to  
electronic components.  
Avoid mounting space temperature  
sensor in areas subject to the following  
conditions:  
• Drafts or “dead” spots behind doors or  
in corners  
• Hot or cold air from ducts  
• Radiant heat from the sun or appliances  
• Concealed pipes and chimneys  
• Unheated or non-cooled surfaces  
behind the sensor, such as outside walls  
• Airflows from adjacent zones or other  
units  
2. After disassembly, protect the internal  
surfaces from contact with objects or  
substances that could cause damage.  
3. Remove the terminal block from  
subbase and set aside for wiring.  
Discard the tape.  
4. Mount the zone sensor module using  
the mounting hardware included in the  
shipping package. The mounting  
hardware is contained in single plastic  
bag and includes:  
Note: Do not overtighten the subbase  
screws. Overtightening may cause the  
screws to crack the subbase.  
9. Before wiring the subbase, identify the  
wires from the units low voltage  
terminal strip. Each screw terminal is  
labeled.  
10. Remove TB from subbase and  
discard the tape.  
11. Strip the wires 1/4” and connect the  
wires from the units low voltage  
terminal strip to the zone sensor  
module subbase. Reference connection  
details on the unit wiring diagrams,  
located on the unit.  
12. Firmly tighten each screw terminal.  
13. Fit the wires as close to the subbase  
as possible.  
• Plastic wall anchors (3 x)  
• Mounting screws (3 x)  
(95 mm)  
The zone sensor module can mount  
directly to a wall or to a junction box  
mounted to a wall.To mount to a  
junction box, you must have the  
mounting plate and adapter kit,  
BAYMTPL003. Installation instructions  
are enclosed with the mounting plate.  
5.To mount the zone sensor module  
directly to a wall:  
(140 mm)  
Figure I-PR-18. BAYSENS019 dimensions  
(95mm)  
Figure I-PR-20. Removing the zone sensor  
module from the subbase  
(140mm)  
Figure I-PR-19. BAYSENS020 dimensions  
Figure I-PR-21. Securing the subbase  
50  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Time Clock Option  
The time clock option has a  
Time Clock Installation Checklist  
1. Ensure operating temperature is 4°F to  
131°F.  
programmable timer that is factory wired  
to the unoccupied input to provide on/off  
control. The time clock will not allow the  
unit to pass through the night setback/  
morning warmup mode, except on units  
with optional night heat/morning warm  
up, or programmable night setback. See  
Figure I-PR-22.  
2. Locate the time clock at least 5 feet  
away from any large electrical contact  
or machinery to avoid possible  
electrical interference problems.  
3. Provide a separate independent circuit  
for the time clock  
power supply.  
4. Since all electronic instruments are  
sensitive to voltage spikes, pay close  
attention to the following:  
The timeclock, a “Digi 20” by Grasslin, is  
inside the control panel, but accessible  
with the control panel door closed. This  
same type timer is also used for pro-  
grammable night setback/morning warm  
up. Programming instructions for the  
“Digi 20” timer are in the “Program-  
ming” section.  
Figure I-PR-22. Grasslin time clock option  
a. If possible, supply power to the  
electronic time clock from a phase  
different than the one supplying power  
to the load  
b. Provide a suitableVaristor or RC  
network across the INDUCTIVE LOADS  
supply terminals to reduce voltage  
spikes.  
c. Place a diode across the DC OPERATED  
INDUCTOR terminals to eliminate back  
EMF.  
d. HIGHLY INDUCTIVE LOADS, especially  
fluorescent lights, may require a relay  
in which case (A) and (C) apply.  
Time Clock Installation  
1. Ensure operating temperature is  
between 4°F and 131°F.  
2. Locate the time clock at least 5 feet  
away from any large electrical contact  
or machinery to avoid possible  
electrical interference problems.  
3. Provide a separate independent circuit  
for the time clock power supply.  
4. Since all electronic instruments are  
sensitive to voltage spikes, pay close  
attention tot he following:  
a. If possible, supply power to the  
electronic time clock from a phase  
different than the one supplying power  
to the load.  
b. Provide a suitableVaristor or RC  
network across the INDUCTIVE  
LOADS supply terminals to reduce  
voltage spikes.  
c. Place a diode across the DC  
OPERATED INDUCTOR terminals to  
eliminate back EMF.  
The Digi 20A timeclock unit can be  
surface or flush mounted. Lift off the  
front cover and loosen the two screws on  
opposite corners. Pull off the bases plug  
with a left to right rolling motion.  
Surface Mounting Inside Panel  
Place screws through the bases preset  
holes and screw to back of panel or wall.  
Wire according to the instructions in the  
following section. Depending upon the  
specific installation, you may find it more  
convenient to complete wiring before  
attaching the base.  
Place the terminal cover over the  
terminal block by aligning the two screws  
with the corner holes in the base. Push  
the timer firmly onto the plug in the base.  
Tighten the two screws. A base for DIN  
rail mounting is optional.  
d. HIGHLY INDUCTIVE LOADS, especially  
fluorescent lights, may require a relay  
in which case step a. and c. apply.  
The timeclock can be surface or flush  
mounted. Lift off the front cover and  
loosen the two screws on opposite  
corners. Pull off the bases plug with a left  
to right rolling motion.  
Wiring theTimeclock  
1. Wire 24, 120, or 220VAC to input  
terminals. Make sure to apply correct  
voltage. Using incorrect voltage will  
void the warranty.  
2. Connect wire to the screw terminals  
according to the unit wiring diagrams.  
Use 12 to 22 AWG wire.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Remote Human Interface Panel  
Installation  
Human Interface (HI) Panel  
The HI enables the user to communicate  
necessary unit operating parameters and  
receive operating status information  
from within the occupied space.  
The HI displays top level information in  
the LCD window, unless the operator  
initiates other displays, for the various  
unit functions. It also displays menu  
readouts in a clear language 2 line, 40  
character format. The 16-key keypad  
allows the operator to scroll through the  
various menus to set or modify the  
operating parameters. See Figure I-PR-  
23 to reference the HI keypad.  
Remote Human Interface Panel  
The remote human interface (RHI) panel  
is identical to the unit mounted HI with the  
exception of the “unit select” key.This  
key allows the operator to switch from  
one unit to the next to program or view  
status information regarding a particular  
unit.  
The RHI functions the same as the unit  
mounted HI with two exceptions. The first  
is the “test start” function. The operator  
can view the service parameters, but can  
only initiate the service test function at  
the unit. The RHI door has a locking screw  
to deter access by unauthorized person-  
nel. Additionally, the RHI can control up to  
four different units.  
Figure I-PR-23. Human interface (HI) panel keypad  
Table I-PR-2. Maximum communication link  
Location Recommendations  
The HI microprocessor module is  
mounted inside a molded plastic  
enclosure for surface mounting. It is not  
weatherproof. Therefore, it is only  
applicable for indoor use.  
AmbientTemperature and Humidity  
Limits  
wiring length  
Ambient Operating Conditions  
Temperature: 32 to 120°F  
• Relative humidity: 10 to 90%, non-  
condensing  
Ambient Storage Conditions  
Temperatures: -50 to 200°F  
• Relative humidity: 5 to 95%, non-  
condensing  
max. wire  
length  
1,000 ft  
2,000 ft  
3,000 ft  
4,000 ft  
5,000 ft  
max. capacitance  
between conductors  
up to 60 pf/ft  
up to 50 pf/ft  
up to 40 pf/ft  
up to 30 pf/ft  
up to 25 pf/ft  
Locate the RHI panel in an area that will  
ensure the communication link between  
the panel and the unit(s) does not exceed  
5,000 feet maximum or pass between  
buildings. SeeTable I-PR-2.  
Note: pf/ft = picofarads/foot  
The run length of the low voltage AC  
power wiring to the remote HI must not  
exceed three (3) ohms/conductor. Refer  
toTable I-PR-3.  
Table I-PR-3.Wiring recommendations for the  
remote HI panel  
distance  
recommended  
wire size  
to remote HI  
0-460 feet  
18 gauge  
16 gauge  
14 gauge  
461-732 feet  
733-1000 feet  
52  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Mounting the Remote Human  
Interface (RHI) Panel  
The installer must provide all mounting  
hardware such as; hand tools, electrical  
boxes, conduit, screws, etc. Refer to  
Figure I-PR-24 for the mounting hole and  
knockout locations.  
a.Verify that the terminal block jumpers  
are connected properly.  
b. Slide the extruded hinge pin at the top  
left of the key pad plate into the hole  
located at the top left hand side of the  
enclosure.  
c. Slide the bottom of the plate into place,  
aligning the two (2) clearance holes  
with the screw holes on the right. Install  
the screws but do not tighten.  
Procedure  
Refer to Figure I-PR-24 and follow the  
procedure below for mounting the  
remote HI panel on a 4” by 4” electrical  
junction box. Place the microprocessor in  
a clean dry location during the enclosure  
mounting procedures to prevent  
damage.  
Note: If the two screws are not installed as  
called out in the previous step, hold against  
the key pad plate while installing the door  
in the next step, to prevent it from falling  
out.  
1. Mount an electrical junction box in the  
wall so that the front edge of the box  
will be flush with the finished wall  
surface.  
2. Prior to mounting the panel, the  
microprocessor module must be  
carefully removed from the enclosure.  
To remove the module:  
a. Lay the remote panel face up on a flat  
surface and remove the locking screw  
from the right hand bottom end of the  
panel.  
b. Remove the recessed hinge screw  
from the left hand bottom end of the  
panel.  
c. Unlatch the door of the enclosure as if  
to open it, and slide the left hand side of  
the door upward away from the hinge.  
Lay it aside.  
d. With the key pad visible, remove the  
two (2) screws located on the right hand  
side of the key pad.  
d. Slide the extruded hinge pin at the top  
left of the door into the hole located  
under the bottom left side of the display.  
e. Install and tighten the hinge screw  
located at the bottom left side of the  
enclosure.  
Wall Mounting the RHI Panel  
1. Prior to mounting the panel, the  
microprocessor module must be  
removed from the enclosure. Complete  
step 2 in the previous discussion,  
“Mounting on a 4 in. x 4 in. Electrical  
Box,” before proceeding.  
2. With the microprocessor removed,  
refer to Figure I-PR-24 for the location of  
the mounting holes to be used for wall  
mounting.  
3. Place the enclosure against the  
mounting surface and mark the  
mounting holes.  
e. Carefully slide the key pad plate  
upward from the bottom, releasing the  
extruded hinge pin from its socket at  
the top.  
f. Set the microprocessor aside until  
mounting is complete.  
Note: The top of the enclosure is marked  
with “TOP.”  
4. With the enclosure in the correct  
position, remove the enclosure and drill  
the necessary holes in the surface for  
the appropriate fasteners, (plastic  
anchors, molly bolts, screws, etc.)  
5. Remove the necessary knockouts for  
the wire or conduit entry before  
mounting the panel.  
3. Remove the junction box knockout in  
the back of the enclosure.  
Note: The top of the enclosure is marked  
“TOP.”  
6. Place the enclosure back onto the  
surface and secure it with the  
appropriate screws.  
7. Follow step 5 in the previous section,  
“Mounting on a 4” by 4” Electrical  
Box,” to replace the microprocessor  
within the enclosure.  
4. With the enclosure in the correct  
position; align the mounting holes  
around the knockout in the enclosure  
with the screw holes in the electrical  
handy box and secure with the  
appropriate screws.  
5. Replace the microprocessor within the  
enclosure as follows:  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Figure I-PR-24. Remote HI mounting holes and knockout locations  
54  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Wiring the Remote Human  
Interface  
The remote human interface requires 24  
VAC + 4 volts power source and a  
shielded twisted pair communication link  
between the remote panel and the  
interprocessor communication bridge  
(ICPB) module at the self-contained unit.  
LowVoltage (AC) FieldWiring  
Note: Although the 24 volt power is not  
polarity sensitive, do not connect either the +  
(plus) or - (minus) terminals from the remote  
panel to ground at the self-contained unit.  
Connections  
To access the wire entry locations, open  
the RHI panel door and remove the two  
screws on the right-hand side of the key  
pad. Swing the keypad open, exposing  
both the wire entries and the back of the  
HI module. Refer to Figure I-PR-24 and  
connect one end of the three conductor  
24 volt wires to the remote panel  
terminal strip (+), (-), and (ground).  
Connect the wire connected to the  
positive (+) terminal at the remote panel.  
Connect the wire connected to the  
negative (-) terminal at the remote panel.  
Connect the ground wire from the remote  
panel to the unit control panel casing.  
Field wiring for both the low voltage  
power and the shielded twisted pair must  
meet the following requirements:  
Communication Link (ShieldedTwisted  
Pair)Wiring  
Interprocessor Communication Bridge  
ModuleWiring  
Trim the outer covering of the shielded  
cable back approximately 1 inch. See  
Figure I-PR-25. Do not cut the bare shield  
wire off. Strip approximately 1/2-inch of  
insulation from each insulated wire to  
connect them to the terminal strip at the  
remote panel.  
Refer to Figure I-PR-25 and trim the outer  
covering of the shielded cable back  
approximately one inch. Cut the bare  
shield wire off even with the outer  
covering. Strip approximately 1/2-inch of  
insulation from each insulated wire in  
order to connect them to the terminal  
strip at the unit.Wrap tape around any  
exposed foil shield and/or base shield  
wire.  
Note: To prevent control malfunctions, do  
not run low voltage wiring (30 volts or less)  
in conduit with higher voltage circuits.  
ƽWARNING  
Connect the white lead to the positive (+)  
terminal, the black lead to the negative (-)  
terminal, and the bare shield wire to the  
terminal at the remote human interface  
panel.  
HazardousVoltage w/Capacitors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
Note:The communication link is polarity  
sensitive.  
Close the key pad plate. Install and  
tighten the two screws removed earlier.  
Close the outer door and install the  
recessed locking screw at the bottom  
right hand side of the enclosure to  
prevent accidental starting of the unit by  
unauthorized personnel while completing  
the wiring at the self-contained unit.  
Refer to the unit wiring diagram and  
connect the white lead to the positive (+)  
terminal and the black lead to the  
negative (-) terminal. (These terminals  
are numbered. Reference to color is for  
clarification to maintain polarity).  
Note: To maintain polarity, do not connect  
the base shield wire to ground at the self-  
contained unit.  
At the Self-Contained Unit  
Connect the opposite end of the three  
conductor 24-volt wire to the appropriate  
terminal strip as follows:  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
1. All wiring must be in accordance with  
NEC and local codes.  
2. ReferenceTable I-PR-3 for  
recommended wiring distance and size.  
3. Communication link wiring must be 18  
AWG shielded twisted pair (Belden  
8760, or equivalent).  
4. Communication link must not exceed  
5,000 feet maximum for each link. See  
Table I-PR-2.  
5. Do not run communication link  
between buildings.  
Figure I-PR-25. Dressing shielded twisted wire  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pre-startup  
requirements  
Installation  
Connecting toTracer Summit  
establish each communication link  
betweenTracer Summit and each unit.  
Tighten locking screws, bearing set  
screws and sheaves.  
Ensure bearing locking collars do not  
wobble when rotated.  
ƽWARNING  
Pre-Startup Checklist  
Complete this checklist after installing the  
unit to verify all recommended  
installation procedures are complete  
before unit start-up. This does not replace  
the detailed instructions in the  
appropriate sections of this manual.  
Always read the entire section carefully  
to become familiar with the procedures.  
Ductwork  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
If using return ductwork to the unit,  
secure it with three inches of flexible  
duct connector.  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
Extend discharge duct upward without  
change in size or direction for at least  
three fan diameters.  
Use a 3” flexible duct connection on  
discharge ductwork.  
Ensure trunk ductwork toVAV boxes is  
complete and secure to prevent leaks.  
Verify that all ductwork conforms to  
NFPA 90A or 90B and all applicable  
local codes  
Receiving  
Inspect unit and components for  
shipping damage. File damage claims  
immediately with the delivering carrier.  
Check unit for missing material. Look  
for ship-with drives, isolators, filters,  
and sensors that are packaged  
separately and placed inside the main  
control panel, fan section, or  
Water-Cooled Unit Piping  
Verify the condensate drain piping is  
complete for the unit drain pan. Install  
and tighten the condensate “P” trap  
drain plug.  
Install water piping drain plugs,  
economizer header, and condenser  
vent plugs.  
Make return and supply water  
connections to the unit and/or waterside  
economizer piping package with  
recommended valves and piping  
components. Refer to the “Water  
Piping” section.  
Install unions to allow waterside  
maintenance.  
Install cooling tower and standby  
pumps.  
Treat water to prevent algae, slime,  
and corrosion.  
Prevent refrigerant piping from rubbing  
against other objects.  
compressor section. See the “Receiving  
and Handling” section.  
Check nameplate unit data so that it  
matches the sales order requirements.  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
Unit Location  
Remove crating from the unit. Do not  
remove the shipping skid until the unit is  
set in its final position.  
IntelliPak commercial self-contained  
(CSC) units operate withTrane building  
automation software,Tracer Summit  
version 10.0.4 or later or any OS2  
operating system.  
Ensure the unit location is adequate for  
unit dimensions, ductwork, piping, and  
electrical connections.  
Ensure access and maintenance  
clearances around the unit are  
adequate. Allow space at the end of the  
unit for shaft removal and servicing.  
See the “Service Access” section.  
Note: Tape the non-insulated end of the  
shield on shielded wire at the unit. Any  
connection between the shield and ground  
will cause a malfunction. If daisy-chained in  
the unit, splice and tape the shields to  
prevent contact with ground.  
Unit Mounting  
Place unit in its final location.  
Remove shipping skid bolts and skid.  
If using isolators, properly mount unit  
according to the isolator placement  
sheet.  
Air-Cooled Units Only  
Connect refrigerant lines.  
Install liquid line filter driers.  
CommunicationWiring  
Note: Communication link wiring is a  
shielded, twisted pair of wire and must  
comply with applicable electrical codes.  
Units with Hydronic Heat  
Verify the entering water temperature  
sensor is installed upstream of the  
hydronic coil.  
Remove shipping brackets on the  
compressors and supply fan.  
Remove the unit protective shipping  
covers.  
An optional communication link provides  
a serial communication interface (SCI)  
betweenTracer Summit and each  
commercial self-contained (CSC) unit in  
the system. The CSC system can have a  
maximum of 12 CSC units per connection  
link toTracer Summit. Use a single 18  
AWG shielded, twisted pair wire with  
stranded, thinned copper conductors to  
Units with Electric Heat  
Verify the supply air temperature  
sensor is downstream of the electric  
heat coil.  
Component Overview  
Verify the fan and motor shafts are  
parallel.  
Verify the fan and motor sheaves are  
aligned.  
Check the belt tension for proper  
adjustment.  
Ensure the fan rotates freely.  
56  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Programmable Zone Sensor  
Options  
BAYSENS019  
Figure I-P-1. BAYSENS019 keypad and display configuration  
BAYSENS019 Keypad and Display  
Explanation  
4. Erase Button  
8. Mode Button  
• Erases time and temperature settings  
throughout each of the programmed  
periods.  
Toggles the controller through its 4  
modes: off, heat, cool, and auto; if HP  
version, also emer (emergency).  
1. Up and Down Buttons  
• Increases or decreased programmed  
temperature settings in program menu.  
• Shifts to temporary manual override in  
normal run mode.  
• Exits temporary manual override.  
9.  
5. Day Button  
Toggles through the seven days of the  
week.  
• Indicates day of the week  
• Indicates begin time in program menu  
Indicates time setting in temporary  
override mode.  
•Increases or decreases temperature  
while in temporary override menu.  
6. HoldTemp Button  
2.Time Adjust Button  
Shifts controller to temporary manual  
override, and begins temperature  
override.  
Used to set the correct time of day. Used  
to set programmed time for temperature  
variations.  
7. Fan Button  
Toggles the fan controller between on  
and auto mode.  
3. Program Button  
Toggles between the display control  
screen and the display program screen.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
BAYSENS020  
Figure I-P-2. BAYSENS020 keypad and display configuration  
BAYSENS020 Keypad and Display  
Explanation  
3. Program Button  
Toggles between the display control  
screen and the display program screen.  
7. Mode Button  
Toggles the controller between the two  
modes, off and auto.  
• Advances to next setpoint in program  
menu.  
1. Up and Down Buttons  
• Increases or decreased programmed  
temperature settings in program menu.  
• Shifts to temporary manual override in  
normal run mode.  
4. Erase Button  
• Erases time and temperature settings  
throughout each of the programmed  
periods.  
8. During Programming Indicates:  
• Heat supply air  
• Cool supply air  
• Warmup temperature  
•Increases or decreases temperature  
while in temporary override menu.  
• Pressed together, toggles between  
unoccupied/occupied setting.  
• Exits temporary manual override.  
5. Day Button  
Toggles through the seven days of the  
week.  
2.Time Adjust Button  
6. HoldTemp Button  
Used to set the correct time of day. Used  
to set programmed time for temperature  
variations.  
Shifts controller to temporary manual  
override, and begins temperature  
override.  
58  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Initial Power-Up  
Program Button  
is installed and warmup options are  
enabled.  
Before applying power to your ZSM, and  
before performing setup and operation  
procedures, verify that all wiring is  
correct. See Figures I-P-9 on page 52 and  
I-P-10 on page 53 for a complete zone  
sensor icon display description.  
Depressing the program button will  
toggle the display from normal run mode  
to the program menu. See Figure I-P-3.  
Before toggling to the program menu,  
use the mode button to select the type  
setpoints to review or program (heat,  
cool or auto). For example, if you select  
cool mode before toggling to the program  
menu, then only the cool setpoints are  
reviewed or programmed. If you select  
heat mode, then only the heat setpoints  
are reviewed or programmed. In auto  
mode, both heat and cool setpoints are  
reviewed and programmed.  
During unoccupied periods, only the  
desired room temperature setpoints are  
entered. Each unoccupied period has a  
heat and cool setpoint, and both setpoints  
are offered during programming.  
For BAYSENS020 only: at initial power-  
up, the ZSM controls to default tempera-  
tures of 68°F (19°C) for warmup, and  
55°F (13°C) supply air, until the ZSM is  
programmed or the arrow keys are  
pressed. If the arrow keys and mode are  
moved, the ZSM starts controlling to  
these new settings.  
Blank temperature settings may also be  
entered. When a setpoint is blank, the  
program will default to the last setpoint of  
its type. If there is no setpoint of its type,  
the default setpoint is used. If all setpoints  
in the time period are blank, the entire  
time period is erased after exiting from  
the program menu.  
• While in program menu, each time you  
press and release the program button,  
the ZSM toggles through the four  
periods that divide each day.Those four  
periods are: Morn(ing), Day, Eve(ning),  
and Night.  
Time and Day Settings  
The ZSM has independent, seven day  
programming:  
• Each day can be programmed with  
different times, temperatures, and  
occupied status.  
• Each day can be programmed with up  
to four periods. Although four periods  
are available each day, you can  
program just one of the four.  
• Each period can be programmed for  
occupied or unoccupied.  
On power-up your ZSM will be in normal  
run mode and will begin operating using  
setpoints. The display will show the  
wrong day and time and will need to be  
set.  
To exit the program menu, depress the  
program button for two seconds.  
To set the time, there is a single rubber  
button on the keypad “minus” and  
“plus” mark time.  
Depressing the positive side will advance  
the time. Depressing the negative side  
will decrease the time.  
To begin programming, follow these  
steps:  
Each time you depress the positive or  
negative side “minus” and “plus”, the  
time will either advance or decrease  
respectively by one minute. If you press  
and hold either side of the time button,  
the time change will accelerate rapidly.  
• Determine which periods during the day  
will be occupied and unoccupied.  
• Write your daily schedule on the sheet  
enclosed with the zone sensor.  
• Enter your program by following the  
steps below.  
When you reach the correct time, release  
the time button and the time will be set  
into permanent memory.  
Figure I-P-3. Display program menu screen  
To program time periods and setpoints  
for a day:  
• Press the program button to enter  
program mode.  
• Press the day button to select first day to  
be programmed.  
To set the “begin” time for the first  
period of the day, press the minus or  
plus keys.  
Program Menu  
Note: To ensure the time changes are  
made, the ZSM will initiate a 30 second  
user-stabilization time before making  
changes to the ZSM operation mode.  
BAYSENS020 Only  
Note: After toggling to the program screen,  
the week is divided into seven days with  
each day divided into four periods.  
Keypad Operation  
To set the temperature setpoint for that  
period, use or ↓.  
Setpoint programming depends on the  
setting status, occupied or unoccupied,  
and whether or not heat is installed,  
modulated heat, morning warmup, or  
daytime warmup options are enabled.  
• Press the program button to move to  
the next period for that day.  
To program time periods and setpoints  
for the next day, press the day button.  
• When finished, press and hold the  
program button for two seconds to  
return to the normal run mode.  
Note: After toggling to the program screen,  
the week is divided into seven days with  
each day divided into four periods.  
Therefore, 28 program settings are pos-  
sible.  
In the occupied period, the cool supply air  
temperature is always set. If heat  
installed and modulated heat options are  
on, the supply air heat is also set during  
occupied periods. The warmup tempera-  
ture is also set in occupied periods, if heat  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Note: Blank temperature settings may be  
entered at any of the four daily periods.  
When a setpoint is left blank and in an  
occupied condition, the ZSM will default to  
the last occupied setpoint. When a setpoint  
is left blank and in an unoccupied condi-  
tion, the ZSM will default to the last  
unoccupied setpoint.  
• Keypad lockout applies only to normal  
run mode and temporary manual  
override mode.  
a temporary manual override menu. See  
Figure I-P-4.  
This mode overrides any number of  
programmed setpoints through any of  
the 28 programmed periods. After  
entering setpoints and length of override  
time, these settings are now used.  
Day Button  
• In normal run mode, depressing the day  
button will move the current day ahead.  
• While in the program menu, depressing  
the day button will move you through  
the seven days of the week and allow  
you to program temperature settings  
for each of the four daily periods.  
Temporary Manual Override  
While in normal run mode, depressing  
the hold temp button toggles the ZSM to  
the temporary manual override menu.  
Erase Button  
• Pressing the erase button while in  
normal run mode will turn off the check  
filter icon.  
The mode will override any number of  
programmed setpoints through any of  
the 28 programmed periods. After  
entering setpoints and length of override  
time, these new settings are used in place  
of the setpoints programmed for normal  
run mode.  
• Pressing the erase button while in the  
program menu, will erase all time and  
temperature setpoints of a given  
period.  
• The erase button will acknowledge the  
failure buzzer (option 16) until 12:00 am.  
Figure I-P-4.Temporary manual override menu  
screen  
Time Button  
Mode Button  
• While in the program menu, each time  
you press and release the positive or  
negative side of the time button, the  
time will advance or decrease by ten  
minute increments. If you press and  
hold the positive or negative side  
(“minus” and “plus” keys), the ZSM  
will increment rapidly.  
Keypad Operation for Temporary  
Manual Override Menu  
• BAYSENS019 only: Pressing the mode  
button toggles through all modes: off,  
heat, cool, auto, and emer (HP unit).  
• BAYSENS020 only: Pressing the mode  
button while in normal run mode, or  
temporary manual override run mode,  
will toggle through both modes, off and  
auto.  
The keypad has the same function in  
temporary manual override menu as in  
all other menus, with a few exceptions:  
• Depressing the day button will toggle  
your ZSM between the day and hour  
icon. See Figure I-P-4.  
• Depressing the mode button will toggle  
your ZSM between the heat and cool  
icons and setpoints.  
• Depressing the erase button will cancel  
the override and return the ZSM to  
normal run mode.  
• Depressing the holdtemp or program  
buttons while in the temporary manual  
override menu will toggle your ZSM to  
the temporary override mode. See  
Figure I-P-5.  
• When the display is in the normal run  
mode, each time you press and release  
the positive or negative side of the time  
button (“minus” and “plus”keys), the  
time will advance or decrease by one  
minute. If you press and hold the  
positive or negative side (“minus” and  
“plus” keys), the ZSM will increment  
rapidly.  
Fan Button  
• The fan button allows you to toggle  
between on and auto.  
Up and Down Button Arrows  
• Depressing or arrow while in normal  
run mode will cause your ZSM to toggle  
to the temporary manual override  
menu.  
• Depressing either or arrow while in  
the program menu or temporary  
override menu will cause the  
temperature setpoint to advance or  
decrease in one degree increments.  
• Depressing and holding either the or ↓  
arrow will cause the temperature  
setting to increment rapidly.  
Note: Blank temperature settings may be  
entered at any of the four daily periods.  
When a setpoint is left blank and in an  
occupied condition, the ZSM will default to  
the last occupied setpoint.  
Keypad Lockout  
If you simultaneously depress and hold  
both the positive and negative sides of  
the “minus” and “plus” keys for four  
seconds, the lock icon will appear and all  
keypad functions will lock out. If you  
repeat this operation, the lock icon will  
disappear and all keypad functions will be  
available again.  
Simultaneously depressing the or ↓  
arrow for two seconds while in the  
program menu or temporary override  
menu will toggle the ZSM between an  
occupied and unoccupied condition.  
Holdtemp Button  
While in normal run mode, depressing  
the hold temp button toggles the ZSM to  
Figure I-P-5. Override run mode screen  
60  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Temporary Override Run Mode  
• Depressing the day button will toggle  
the ZSM between the day and hour  
icon.  
• Depressing the mode button will toggle  
the ZSM between the heat and cool  
icons and setpoints.  
• Depressing the erase button will cancel  
the override and return the ZSM to  
normal run mode.  
• If no button is pressed for 20 seconds,  
the ZSM exits temporary manual  
override menu and enters the normal  
run mode, ignoring the temporary  
manual override menu settings.  
The temporary override run mode sends  
setpoint data to the unit control module  
(UCM) from the setpoint data entered in  
the temporary manual override menu.  
In temporary override run mode, most of  
the keypad functions lock out with these  
exceptions:  
• The mode button still functions as in  
normal run mode.  
• The fan button still functions as in  
normal run mode.  
• Depressing the holdtemp button toggles  
the ZSM between the temporary  
manual override menu and override  
run mode. (if no button is pressed for 20  
seconds while in temporary manual  
override menu, the ZSM exits to normal  
run mode, ignoring the temporary  
override settings.)  
Temporary Manual Override Run Mode  
The temporary manual override run  
mode sends setpoint data to the UCM  
from the setpoint data entered in the  
temporary manual override menu. See  
Figure I-P-7.  
• Depressing either the or arrow while  
in the override run mode will cause the  
ZSM to toggle to the temporary manual  
override menu.  
• The erase button will turn off the check  
filter icon if displayed.  
• Simultaneously depressing and holding  
the positive and negative sides of the  
“minus” and “plus” for four seconds  
will lock out the keypad.  
•Time is not adjustable in this mode.  
• The program button is disabled.  
In temporary manual override run mode,  
most of the keypad functions lock out with  
these exceptions:  
• The mode button still functions as in  
normal run mode.  
• Depressing the holdtemp button toggles  
the ZSM between temporary manual  
override menu and temporary manual  
override run mode. If no button is  
pressed for 20 seconds, while in the  
temporary manual override menu, the  
ZSM exits to the normal run mode,  
ignoring the temporary manual  
override settings.  
Keypad Operation for Temporary  
Manual Override Menu  
The keypad has the same function in  
temporary manual override menu as in  
all other menus, with a few exceptions:  
• Depressing the holdtemp or program  
buttons while in temporary manual  
override menu will enter settings and  
begin temporary manual override run  
mode. See Figure I-P-6.  
• Depressing either the up or down arrow  
keys while in temporary manual  
override run mode will cause the ZSM  
to toggle to temporary manual override  
menu.  
• The erase button will turn off the check  
filter icon if displayed.  
• Simultaneously depressing and holding  
the positive and negative sides of the  
minus/plus key for four seconds will lock  
out the keypad.  
•Time is not adjustable in this mode.  
Figure I-P-6.Temporary manual override menu  
screen  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Table I-P-1. Zone sensor BAYSENS019 option menu settings  
option  
1
description  
morning warmup  
value  
factory setting  
0
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
economizer minimum  
position override  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
0 = Fahrenheit  
1 = enabled  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
0 = 12 hours  
1 = 24 hours  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
0 = 7 days (M,T,W,T,F,S,S)  
1 = 3 days (M-F, S, S)  
2 = 2 days (M-F, S,S)  
1
temperature scale  
supply air tempering  
time clock  
0
0
0
1
0
0
smart fan  
Figure I-P-7.Temporary manual override run  
mode screen  
intelligent temperature recovery  
programmable days/week  
Option Menu and Keypad Operation  
The operation menu sets all  
programmable options built into your  
ZSM. All options are retained in  
permanent EEPROM memory.  
9
10  
programmable periods/day  
programmable fan operation  
2,3,4  
4
0
0 = disallowed  
1 = allowed  
11  
12  
remote sensor installed  
check filter interval  
0 = No  
1 =Yes  
0
To access the option menu display,  
simultaneously depress and hold the  
mode button and program button for four  
seconds.  
0 = disabled  
350  
3000 to 50 in 50 hour  
increments  
13  
14  
15  
16  
display zone temperature  
keypad lockout enabled  
0 = no  
1
1
3
1
1 = yes  
The example in Figure I-P-8 shows option  
15 displayed and indicates the initial timer  
setting in the temporary override run  
mode. The option value shown is in  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
1,2,3,4,5  
initial time setting in temporary  
override mode (hrs.)  
buzzer options  
0 = key press only  
hours, and value selected is five hours.  
1 = key press & check filter  
2 = key press, check filter,  
and system failures  
When the option menu displays, the only  
active buttons are the or arrow and  
the “minus” and “plus” button. The or  
arrow increment through the available  
options by number (1-24), and the  
“minus” and “plus” button toggles  
through the various option values  
associated with each option number. See  
Table I-P-1.  
17  
18  
zone temperature calibration  
baud rate  
displays current temp.  
with any offsets  
0 = 1024 baud  
1 = 1200 baud  
0 = CV  
1 = HP  
45 to 98°F  
43 to 96°F  
45 to 98°F  
43 to 96°F  
0 offset  
1
19  
CV or HP operation  
0
20  
21  
22  
23  
default cooling setpoint  
default heating setpoint  
minimum cooling setpoint  
maximum heating setpoint  
74°F  
68°F  
45°F  
96°F  
Note: On both programmable zone sensor  
options, changing either option 9 or 10 will  
erase the current program. To avoid  
reprogramming, set options 9 and 10  
before programming.  
Figure I-P-8.Typical option menu screen  
62  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Note: On both programmable zone sensor  
options, changing either option 9 or 10 will  
erase the current program. To avoid  
reprogramming, set options 9 and 10  
before programming.  
Table I-P-2. Zone sensor BAYSENS020 option menu settings  
option  
description  
value  
factory  
setting  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
morning warmup  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
0 = Fahrenheit  
1 = enabled  
economizer minimum  
position override  
temperature scale  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Intelligent Copy  
heat installed  
0 = no  
Note: Once you use Intelligent Copy, you  
cannot use it again until you erase all  
weekday and weekend time periods by  
pressing ERASE for 5 seconds.  
1 = yes  
time clock  
0 = 12 hours  
1 = 24 hours  
hydronic heat  
0 = no  
1 = yes  
daytime warmup  
programmable days/week  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
0 = 7 days (M,T,W,T,F,S,S)  
1 = 3 days (M-F, S, S  
2 = 2 days (M-F, S,S)  
If your heating and cooling requirements  
are the same for each day of the week,  
and for each day of the weekend, your  
ZSM is designed to employ Intelligent  
Copy.  
9
10  
programmable periods/day  
remote sensor installed  
2,3,4  
4
0
0 = no  
1 = yes  
To program the five weekdays, Monday  
through Friday, program only one  
weekday. Likewise, to program the  
weekend, Saturday and Sunday, pro-  
gram only one day. After programming  
one weekday and/or one weekend day,  
Intelligent Copy automatically copies your  
program to the other days.  
11  
check filter interval  
0 = disabled  
350  
3000 to 50 in 50 hour  
increments  
12  
13  
14  
15  
display zone temperature  
keypad lockout rnabled  
0 = no  
1
1
3
1
1 = yes  
0 = disabled  
1 = enabled  
1,2,3,4,5  
initial time setting in temporary  
override mode (hrs.)  
buzzer options  
0 = key press only  
1 = key press & check filter  
2 = key press, check filter,  
and system failures  
To use Intelligent Copy:  
1) Be sure to select the seven day  
programming format in the Options  
Menu. SeeTables I-P-1 and I-P-2.  
2) Be sure the entire program is blank.  
3) Go to Program Menu.  
16  
zone temperature calibration  
displays current temp.  
with any offsets  
0 offset  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
default cooling setpoint  
default heating setpoint  
default supply air cool  
default supply air heat  
default warmup  
minimum cooling setpoint  
maximum heating setpoint  
minimum supply air cool  
maximum supply air heat  
maximum warmup  
45 to 98°F (unoccupied)  
43 to 96°F (unoccupied)  
40 to 80°F (occupied)  
60 to 160°F  
50 to 90°F (occupied)  
45 to 98°F  
43 to 96°F  
40 to 80°F (occupied)  
60 to 160°F  
74°F  
68°F  
55°F  
100°F  
68°F  
45°F  
96°F  
40°F  
160°F  
90°F  
4) Enter your setpoint parameters.  
Intelligent Copy will automatically copy  
these parameters to the other  
weekdays.  
5) Depress the DAY pushbutton until a  
weekend day icon appears.  
6) Enter setpoint parameters. Intelligent  
Copy will automatically copy these  
parameters to the other weekend day.  
50 to 90°F  
Remote Panel Indicator Signals From  
UCM to ZSM  
Table I-P-3. UCM signal conditions  
The unit control module (UCM) can send  
four signals to the ZSM.  
signal  
on  
condition  
heat  
cool  
on  
FlashingHEAT is ON and indicated by a solid HEAT icon in the  
Display. Failure in the cooling system indicated by a flashing COOL  
FAIL icon.  
FlashingCOOLING is ON and indicated by a solid COOL icon in the  
Display. Failure in the cooling system indicated by a flashing  
COOL FAIL icon.  
FlashingSystem is OFF and indicated by a solid colon on the time of  
day display. System is ON and indicated by a flashing colon on  
the time of day display. System is in TEST mode and indicated by a  
flashing TEST icon.  
• Heat  
• Cool  
• On  
on  
off  
on  
• Service  
Each of these four signals have three  
different conditions. SeeTable I-P-3.  
• Off  
• On  
• Flashing  
service  
flashing  
ON System requires service and is indicated by a solid SERVICE  
icon.There is a FAN failure indicated by a flashing SERVICE icon.  
Note: There is no indication for a signal in the OFF condition. If option 16 is set to “2,” any flashing signals will  
also give audible buzzer indication  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Figure I-P-9. BAYSENS019 complete icon display  
Icon Descriptions  
9. Displays the desired state of either  
OCCUPIED or UNOCCUPIED.  
10. The padlock symbol indicates that the  
keyboard lockout is in effect.  
11. This extends the mode selection box  
in order to accommodate the  
emergency heat mode on the ZSM heat  
pump version.  
12. Fan mode selection box.  
13. Displayed in normal run mode when  
displaying the actual room  
temperature.  
14. Displayed in option setting mode only.  
15. Digits used to display temperature.  
16. HEAT and COOL have two functions:  
they indicate UCM status in normal run  
mode and indicate which type of  
setpoint is DESIRED during  
programming and override setting.  
17. Only used during programming and  
override setting to indicate the  
DESIRED setpoint temperature.  
18. Flashes when check filter timer is  
elapsed.  
19. Flashing cooling fail status indicator.  
20. Only used during UCP self-test mode.  
21. Flashing service status indicator and  
fan failure.  
22. Flashing heating fail status indicator.  
23. Operating MODE selection box.  
BAYSENS019 Icon Descriptions  
Refer to Figure I-P-9 for the written  
descriptions below.  
1. The four periods of the day used only  
during programming mode.  
2. The seven days of the week used  
during programming and in normal  
mode to display the day (not current in  
Program Menu).  
3. Four digits used to display the time of  
day in normal run mode. Also used in  
Programming Menu andTemporary  
manual Override Menu, and options  
menu.  
4.Time of day colon used on the time of  
day clock. The colon blinks to indicate  
the UCM system is functional.  
5. AM and PM are used to indicate the  
time of day when using a 12 hour clock.  
AM and PM are not used when a 24  
hour clock is selected.  
6. DAYS and HOURS are used to set the  
override timer period.  
7. Displayed in temporary manual  
OVERRIDE mode, and when setting the  
override timer.  
8. Only used when setting the override  
timer.  
64  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Figure I-P-10. BAYSENS020 complete icon display  
Programming, Run, and Menu.  
10. The padlock symbol indicates that the  
keyboard lockout is in effect.  
BAYSEN020 Icon Descriptions  
Refer to Figure I-P-10 for the written  
descriptions below.  
1. The four periods of the day used only  
during programming mode.  
2. The seven days of the week used  
during programming and in normal run  
mode.  
3. Four digits used to display the time of  
day in normal run mode. Also used in  
Programming Mode, override timer  
setting menu, and options menu.  
4.Time of day colon used on the time of  
day clock. The colon blinks to indicate  
the UCM system is functional.  
5. AM and PM are used to indicate the  
time of day when using a 12 hour clock.  
AM and PM are not used when a 24  
hour clock is selected.  
11. Operating mode selection box.  
12. Displayed in normal run mode when  
displaying the actual room  
temperature.  
13. Displayed in option setting mode only.  
14. Digits used to display temperature.  
15. HEAT and COOL have two functions:  
they indicate UCM status in normal run  
mode and indicate which type of  
setpoint is DESIRED during  
programming and override setting.  
16. Only used during programming and  
override setting to indicate the  
DESIRED setpoint temperature.  
17. Flashes when check filter timer is  
elapsed.  
18. Flashing cooling fail status indicator.  
19. Only used during UCP self-test mode.  
20. Flashing service status indicator and  
fan failure.  
6. DAYS and HOURS are used to set the  
override timer period.  
7. Displayed in temporary manual  
OVERRIDE mode, and when setting the  
override timer.  
8. Only used when setting the override  
timer.  
9. Displays the desired state of either  
OCCUPIED or UNOCCUPIED in the  
21. Flashing heating fail status indicator.  
22. Used in programming mode to set  
HEAT SUPPLY AIR, COOL SUPPLY AIR,  
and MORNINGWARM-UP  
temperatures.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
programming  
Programming theTime Clock  
Option  
Programming  
Follow the instructions below for  
programming the time clock.  
To review and change programs:  
1.To review a program at any time, press  
“Prog.” key. Programs display in the  
sequence they were entered with  
repeated presses of “Prog.” key.  
2.To change a program, select that  
program as outlined in step 1. Enter the  
time of day and days of week just as in  
the programming steps above. The old  
program is overwritten with the new  
selections. Press “Prog.” to store the  
new program.  
3.To delete an individual program, select  
the program as in step 1 and press “h”  
and “m” keys until “—:—” appears in  
the display. Press either “Prog.” or “¹”  
key until “—:—” flashes. The program  
is deleted after a few seconds.  
Setting theTime  
1. Press “Prog.” key. 1234567 AM—:—  
will appear in display. (Pressing “Prog.”  
key again, display will show the number  
of free programs “Fr 20”). Press again  
to RETURN to 1st program.  
2. Press “%” key, “~” ON symbol will  
appear. Pressing the key again will  
toggle to OFF “”. Select ON or OFF  
for the program.  
3. Press “h+” to select hour for switching  
time.  
4. Press “m+” to select minute for  
switching time.  
5. If the program is to occur every day of  
the week, (24 hour time control) ignore  
“Day” key and press “Prog.” key to  
advance to program.  
6. For 7 day time control, press “Day”  
key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 (Monday through  
Saturday) block of days appears in  
display. Pressing “Day” key again, 1 2 3  
4 5 (Monday through Friday) appears in  
display. Repeated presses will cycle  
through all days of the week and back  
to 1 through 7 (Monday through  
Sunday). Select day or block of days  
desired.  
Important: Depress the reset key before  
beginning to set time and program.  
1. Select military (24:00 hr.) or AM/PM  
(12:00 hr.) time mode by depressing  
and holding the “h” key while pressing  
“+ 1h” key to toggle between military  
and AM/PM. (AM appears in the display  
when in AM/PM mode.)  
2. Press and hold down “Ÿ” key.  
3. If setting the time when daylight  
savings time is in effect, press “+ 1h”  
key once (+ 1h will appear in display).  
4. Set hour with “h” key. If AM or PM  
does not appear in display, the unit is in  
military time. See note above to  
change display.  
Manual Override  
While in the “run” mode (“Ÿ” symbol is  
displayed), pressing the “%” key will  
reverse the load status (switch load off if  
it is on, or switch it on if it is off). A hand  
symbol appears in the display to indicate  
the override is active. At the next  
5. Set minutes with “m” key.  
6. Press “Day” key repeatedly to the day  
of the week. (1 is Monday, 7 is Sunday)  
7. Release “Ÿ” key, colon will begin  
flashing.  
scheduled switching time, automatic time  
control resumes, eliminating the override.  
Note: If keys h + or m + are kept depressed  
for longer than 2 seconds, a rapid advance  
of figures will result.  
Pressing the “%” key a second time  
“[~]” appears in the display indicating  
the load is permanently on.  
7. Press “Prog.” key and repeat steps 2  
through 6a to enter additional  
programs of ON and OFF times. (Note  
that more than one OFF time may be  
programmed, enabling automatic  
control or manual overrides.)  
Pressing the “%” key a third time “[]”  
appears in the display indicating the load  
is permanently off.  
The “Digi 20” electronic time switch is  
freely programmable for each day of the  
week in one minute increments. For easy  
and quick programming, the following 4  
block programs are available:  
• Monday through Sunday  
Pressing the “%” key a fourth time  
returns to automatic, “%” appears in the  
display.  
8. Press “Ÿ” key to enter run mode.  
• Monday through Saturday  
All days shown in the respective blocks  
will switch on (or off) at the selected hour  
and minute.  
• Monday through Friday  
• Saturday and Sunday  
66  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
startup  
Unit Startup Procedures  
fraying belts in matched sets.  
7. Measure amp draw at evaporator fan  
motor terminals. FLA data is on the  
motor nameplate.  
8. After the system has stabilized (15 to 30  
minutes), check and record operating  
pressures and temperatures for all  
circuits.  
Startup  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
ƽWARNING  
Live Electrical Components!  
Using the startup log on the following  
pages, establish nominal conditions for  
consistent measurements as follows:  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
During installation, testing, servicing and  
troubleshooting of this product, it may  
be necessary to work with live electrical  
components. Have a qualified licensed  
electrician or other individual who has  
been properly trained in handling live  
electrical components perform these  
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety  
precautions when exposed to live  
electrical components could result in  
death or serious injury.  
• Leaving air greater than 60°F  
• Entering air temperature = 70 to 90°F  
• Entering water temperature > 60°F  
• Inlet guide vanes at least halfway open  
With all compressors running at full load:  
1. Compute superheat from the suction  
line pressure and temperature at the  
compressor on each circuit. Adjust the  
thermal expansion valve settings if  
necessary. Superheat should be  
between 12 and 17°F.  
2. Inspect refrigerant flow in the liquid line  
sight glass. Flow should be smooth and  
even, with no bubbles once the system  
has stabilized.  
NOTICE  
Compressor Damage!  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
Never manually or automatically pump  
down system below 7 psig.This will  
cause the compressor to operate in a  
vacuum and result in compressor  
damage.  
Normal startup will occur provided that  
Tracer Summit is not controlling the  
module outputs or the generic BAS is not  
keeping the unit off.To preventTracer  
Summit from affecting unit operation,  
removeTracerwiring and make required  
changes to setpoint and sensor sources.  
Pre-Startup Checklist  
1.Verify electrical connections are tight.  
2.Water-cooled: Access the liquid line  
service valves.Verify the liquid line  
service valve is open at startup.  
To start the unit, complete the following  
steps in order.  
1. Apply power to the unit. Close the unit  
disconnect switch option.  
2. Make sure the liquid line service valves  
are open on water cooled units.  
3. Adjust setpoints at the HI.  
Operating & Programming Instructions  
Reference the IntelliPak Self-Contained  
Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01B-EN,  
for available unit operating setpoints and  
instructions. A copy ships with each unit.  
For units with the VFD option, reference  
the installer guide that ships with each  
VFD.  
Note: Each compressor suction line  
contains a low pressure sensor that will  
shut the compressor down in low pressure  
situations. See Table O-SO-2.  
Note: A sufficient cooling load must be  
visible to refrigerant circuit controls for  
mechanical refrigeration to operate. If  
necessary, temporarily reduce the dis-  
charge air setpoint to verify the refrigeration  
cycle operation.  
3. Ensure system components are  
properly set and installed.  
4. Inspect all ductwork and connections.  
5. Remove compressor and fan  
assembly tie down bolts. On 20 - 38 ton  
units, do not remove the fan assembly  
shipping blocks.Tie down bolts if the fan  
speed is 750 rpm or less.  
6. Ensure fan rotation is in the direction of  
the arrow on the fan housing. If it is  
incorrect, verify the incoming power  
phasing is correct. Switch wires on the  
fan contact to properly phase fan if  
necessary.  
4. Check voltage at all compressor  
terminals to ensure it is within 10% of  
nameplate voltage.  
5. Check voltage imbalance from these  
three voltage readings at each  
compressor. Maximum allowable  
voltage imbalance, phase to phase is  
2%.  
6. Check amp draw at compressor  
terminals. RLA and LRA is on the unit  
nameplate.  
7. Check the fan belt condition and tension.  
Adjust the tension if belts are floppy or  
squeal continually. Replace worn or  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
startup  
Startup Log  
Complete this log at unit startup.  
Unit: ____________________________  
Unit Location: _________________________________________  
UnitVoltage: __________ __________ __________  
A
B
C
Evaporator:  
evaporator fan motor horsepower: __________ evaporator fan motor amps: __________ __________ __________  
A
B
C
evaporator fan rpm (actual): ____________________  
evaporator system static (from test and balance report or actual readings):  
supply duct static: __________  
return duct static: __________  
evaporator air conditions with both compressors operating:  
entering:  
dry-bulb °F: __________  
leaving:  
dry-bulb °F: __________  
wet-bulb °F: __________  
wet-bulb °F: __________  
evaporator system cfm (test and balance sheet or actual tested): __________  
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
Compressor Amp Draw:  
circuit A: __________ __________ __________ circuit B: __________ __________ __________  
A
B
C
A
B
C
circuit C: __________ __________ __________ circuit D: __________ __________ __________  
A
B
C
A
B
C
circuit E: __________ __________ __________ circuit F: __________ __________ __________  
A
B
C
A
B
C
suction pressure, psig:  
circuit A: __________  
circuit E: __________  
circuit B: __________  
circuit F: __________  
circuit B: __________  
circuit F: _________  
circuit B: __________  
circuit F: _________  
circuit B: __________  
circuit F: _________  
circuit B: __________  
circuit F: _________  
circuit C: __________  
circuit D: __________  
circuit D: __________  
circuit D: __________  
circuit D: __________  
circuit D: __________  
discharge pressure, psig: circuit A: __________  
circuit E: __________  
circuit C: __________  
circuit C: __________  
circuit C: __________  
circuit C: __________  
super heat °F:  
circuit A: __________  
circuit E: __________  
circuit A: __________  
circuit E: __________  
circuit A: __________  
circuit E: __________  
liquid line pressure, psig:  
sub cooling °F:  
68  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
startup  
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
Water Cooled Units:  
Circuit A:  
entering water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water pressure, psig: __________  
entering water pressure, psig: __________  
Circuit B:  
enter water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water pressure, psig: __________  
entering water pressure, psig: __________  
Circuit C:  
entering water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water pressure, psig: __________  
entering water pressure, psig: __________  
Circuit D:  
enter water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water pressure, psig: __________  
entering water pressure - psig: __________  
Circuit E:  
enter water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water pressure, psig: __________  
entering water pressure - psig: __________  
Circuit F:  
enter water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water temperature °F: __________  
leaving water pressure, psig: __________  
entering water pressure - psig: __________  
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
Air Cooled Units:  
(data taken from outside condensing unit)  
voltage: __________ __________ __________  
amp draw: __________ __________ __________  
A
B
C
A
B
C
entering air temperature °F: __________  
leaving air temperature °F: __________  
refrigerant pressures at condenser, psig: __________/ __________ sub cooling at condenser °F: __________  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
Binary outputs  
V.O. relay  
Points List - RTM Module  
• Supply air temperature  
• Supply fan status  
• Unit status mode  
• Zone CO2  
Binary inputs  
• Emergency stop  
• External auto/stop  
• Unoccupied/occupied  
• Dirty filter  
Points List -TracerTM LCI-I Module  
ConstantVolume (CV) Points  
Binary inputs  
• Zone relative humidity  
VariableAirVolume (VAV) Points  
VAV changeover with hydronic heat  
• Airside economizer enable/disable  
• Condensor type (air or water cooled)  
• Condensor water flow status  
• Emergency shutdown  
• Local fan switch enable/disable  
• Mechanical cooling lockout  
• Mechanical heating lockout  
• Mixed air temperature  
Binary inputs  
• Airside economizer enable/disable  
• Condensor water flow input  
• Emergency override  
• Local fan switch enable/disable  
• Mechanical cooling lockout  
• Mechanical heating lockout  
• Occupancy  
Binary outputs  
VAV box drive max (VAV units only)  
• CV unoccupied mode indicator (CV units  
only)  
• Alarm  
• Fan run request  
Water pump request (water-cooled only)  
• Occupancy  
• Occupancy override  
• Occupancy sensor  
Binary outputs  
• Airside economizer status  
• Alarm status  
• Compressor on/off status  
• Condensor circuit information  
• Condensor type (water or air cooled)  
• Condensor waterflow status  
• Condensor water pump status  
Analog input  
• Airside economizer damper minimum  
position  
Binary outputs  
• Airside economizer status  
• Alarm status  
• Compressor on/off status  
• Condensor circuit information  
• Condensor water pump status  
Waterside economizer status  
Analog output  
• Outside air damper actuator  
Heat Module:  
• Analog output  
Analog inputs  
Points List - GBAS Module  
• Airside economizer dry bulb setpoint  
• Airside economizer minimum position  
• Building static pressure input  
• Building static pressure setpoint  
• Daytime warm up setpoint  
• Daytime warm up terminate setpoint  
• Maintenance required time  
• Occupancy bypass time  
• Outdoor air damp min position setpoint  
• Outdoor airflow minimum setpoint  
• Outdoor air relative humidity  
• Outdoor air temperature  
• Supply air cooling setpoint  
• Supply air cooling setpoint (default)  
Analog inputs  
Binary inputs  
• Demand limit contacts  
• Airside economizer dry bulb setpoint  
• Airside economizer minimum setpoint  
• Building static pressure input  
• Maintenance required time  
• Occupancy bypass time  
• Outdoor air damper minimum position  
setpoint  
• Outdoor air relative humidity  
• Outdoor air temperature  
Binary outputs  
• Dirty filter relay  
• Refrigeration fail relay  
• Heat fail relay  
• Supply fan fail relay  
• Active diagnostics  
Analog inputs  
• Unit start delay time setpoint  
• Zone temperature  
• Occupied zone cooling setpoint  
• Occupied zone heating setpoint  
• Unoccupied zone cooling setpoint  
• Unoccupied zone heating setpoint or  
minimum outside air flow setpoint  
• Supply air cooling setpoint  
• Supply air heating setpoint  
• Zone temperature setpoint  
• Zone temperature setpoint (default)  
• Zone temperature setpoint limits  
• Zone temperature setpoint offsets  
• Zone temperature setpoint shift  
Analog outputs  
• Building static pressure status  
• Alarm message  
• Condensor saturated refrigerant temp.  
• Condensor water temperature  
• Condensor water temp (local)  
• Cooling output status  
• Exhaust fan status  
• Heating output status  
• Heating/cooling mode  
• Mixed air temperature  
Analog outputs  
• Alarm message  
• Building static pressure status  
•Condensor saturated refrigerant temp  
• Condensor water temperature  
• Cooling output status  
• Effective occupancy  
• Exhaust fan status  
• Heating output status  
• Heating/cooling mode  
• Supply air static pressure setpoint  
Points List - ECEM Module  
Analog inputs  
• Return air temperature  
• Return air humidity  
• Morning warm up sensor temperature  
• Outdoor air damper position  
• Outdoor air enthalpy  
In addition, units with aVOM have:  
Binary inputs  
VOM mode A, unit off  
• Morning warm up sensor temperature  
• Outdoor air damper position  
• Outdoor air enthalpy  
• Outdoor air relative humidity  
• Return air temperature  
• Outdoor air flow  
VOM mode B, pressurize  
VOM mode C, exhaust  
VOM mode D, purge  
• Outdoor air relative humidity status  
• Outdoor air temperature status  
• Return air temperature  
VOM mode E, purge w/duct pressure control  
70  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
Unit Control Components  
input of the RTM. The RTM must be  
selected as the source for economizer  
minimum position. If the RTM is the  
selected source for economizer minimum  
position, and if a valid resistance per  
Table O-GI-1 is provided to the RTM  
remote minimum position input, the OA  
cfm compensation function will not  
operate, even if enabled. “Default” is the  
only possible source for economizer  
minimum position when using the OA  
cfm compensation function.  
unoccupied and morning warmup mode.  
They will return to the position shown on  
the unit wiring diagram when the unit  
returns to the occupied mode. This binary  
output signals theVAV boxes or other  
terminal devices to go full open.  
The Modular Series IntelliPakself-  
contained unit is controlled by a  
microelectronic control system that  
consists of a network of modules. These  
modules are referred to as unit control  
modules (UCM). In this manual, the  
acronym UCM refers to the entire control  
system network.  
RTM Alarm Relay  
This is a single pole, double throw relay  
rated at a maximum voltage of 24 vac,  
two amps max. Relay contacts can be  
programmed from the unit human  
interface. This relay can be programmed  
to pick up on any one or group of  
diagnostics from the unit human  
interface.  
These modules perform specific unit  
functions using proportional/integral  
control algorithms. They are mounted in  
the unit control panel and are factory  
wired to their respective internal compo-  
nents. Each module receives and  
interprets information from other unit  
modules, sensors, remote panels, and  
customer binary contacts to satisfy the  
applicable request; i.e., economizing,  
mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation.  
Following is a detailed description of each  
modules function.  
Table O-GI-1. Economizer remote minimum  
position input resistance  
input  
economizer  
Status/Annunciator Output  
resistance  
min. position  
The status annunciator output is an  
internal function within the RTM module  
on CV andVAV units. It provides:  
a. diagnostic and mode status signals to  
the remote panel (LEDs) and to the  
Human Interface.  
0 - 30 ohms  
0 %  
0-100 % (linear)  
100 %  
30 - 240 ohms  
240 - 350 ohms  
> 350 ohms  
N/A *  
* Note: A resistance greater than 350 ohms is  
assumed to be an open circuit. The system will use  
the default minimum position value.  
RTM Analog Outputs  
b. control of the binary alarm output on  
the RTM.  
c. control of the binary outputs on the  
GBAS module to inform the customer  
of the operational status and/or  
diagnostic conditions.  
The RTM has two 0-10 vdc outputs: one  
for the inlet guide vane option and one for  
the economizer option. These outputs  
provide a signal for one or two damper  
actuators. There are no terminal strip  
locations associated with these wires.  
They go directly from pins on the RTM  
circuit board to the actuator motor.  
RTM Module Board - Standard  
on all Units  
The RTM responds to cooling, heating,  
and ventilation requests by energizing the  
proper unit components based on  
information received from other unit  
modules, sensors, remote panels, and  
customer supplied binary inputs. It  
initiates supply fan, exhaust fan, exhaust  
damper, inlet guide vane positioning or  
variable frequency drive output, and  
airside economizer operation based on  
that information.  
Occupied/Unoccupied Inputs  
There are four ways to switch to  
occupied/unoccupied:  
1. Field-supplied contact closure  
hardwired binary input to the RTM  
2. Programmable night setback zone  
sensor  
RTM Binary Outputs  
The RTM has an output with pressure  
switch proving inputs for the supply fan.  
There is a 40 second delay from when  
the RTM starts the supply fan until the fan  
proving input must close. A fan failure  
diagnostic will occur after 40 seconds.  
This is a manual reset diagnostic, and all  
heating, cooling, and economizer  
functions will shut down. If this proving  
input is jumped, other nuisance  
3.Tracer Summit  
4. Factory-mounted time clock  
Reference the RTM points list.  
VAV Changeover Contacts  
These contacts are connected to the RTM  
when daytime heating onVAV units with  
internal or external hydronic heat is  
required. Daytime (occupied) heating  
switches the system to a CV unit  
Note: Emergency stop and external auto/  
stop, stop the unit immediately, emergency  
stop generates a manual reset diagnostic  
that must be reset at the unit human  
interface. External auto-stop will return the  
unit to the current operating mode when  
the input is closed, so this input is auto  
reset.  
diagnostics will occur. If the proving input  
fails to close in 40 seconds, the  
economizer cycles to the minimum  
position. This is a manual reset  
diagnostic. External control of the fan is  
not recommended.  
operation. Refer to the unit wiring  
diagram for the field connection terminals  
in the unit control panel. The switch must  
be rated at 12 ma @ 24 VDC minimum.  
External Auto/Stop Switch  
VAV Drive Max Output  
RTM Remote Economizer Minimum  
Position  
The remote minimum position  
potentiometer, BAYSTAT023A, provides  
a variable resistance (0-270 ohms) to  
adjust the economizer minimum position  
from 0 to 100% when connected to the  
economizer remote minimum position  
A field-supplied switch may be used to  
shut down unit operation. This switch is a  
binary input wired to the RTM. When  
opened, the unit shuts down immediately  
and can be cancelled by closing the  
switch. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams  
(attached to the unit control panel) for  
proper connection terminals. The switch  
This is a single-pole, double-throw relay  
rated at a maximum voltage of 24 vac,  
two amps. The relay contacts of this relay  
switch when theunit goes from the  
occupied mode to the unoccupied mode  
bymeans of the occupied binary input.  
The contacts will stay switched during the  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
must be rated for 12 ma @ 24VDC  
Table O-GI-2. RTM sensor resistance vs. temperature  
minimum. This input will override all VOM  
inputs, if the VOM option is on the unit.  
temperature, °F  
resistance, Ω ohms  
346.1  
241.7  
temperature, °F  
resistance, Ω ohms  
11.60  
11.31  
11.03  
10.76  
10.50  
10.25  
10.00  
9.76  
-40  
-30  
-20  
-10  
-5  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
Occupied/Unoccupied Contacts  
170.1  
121.4  
103.0  
87.56  
74.65  
To provide night setback control if a  
remote panel with night setback was not  
ordered, install a field-supplied contact.  
This binary input provides the buildings  
occupied/unoccupied status to the RTM. It  
can be initiated by a time clock, or a  
building automation system control  
output.The relays contacts must be rated  
for 12 ma @ 24 VDC minimum. Refer to  
the appropriate wiring diagrams  
0
5
10  
15  
20  
25  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
55  
60  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
63.8  
54.66  
46.94  
40.40  
34.85  
30.18  
26.22  
22.85  
19.96  
6.53  
9.30  
8.25  
7.33  
5.82  
5.21  
4.66  
3.76  
3.05  
2.50  
2.05  
1.69  
1.40  
1.17  
0.985  
0.830  
80  
85  
90  
100  
105  
110  
120  
130  
140  
150  
160  
170  
180  
190  
200  
(attached to the unit control panel for the  
proper connection terminals in the unit  
control panel.  
17.47  
Emergency Stop Input  
15.33  
13.49  
13.15  
12.82  
12.50  
12.19  
A binary input is provided on the RTM  
board for installation of a field-supplied  
normally closed (N.C.) switch to use  
during emergency situations to shut  
down all unit operations. When open, an  
immediate shutdown occurs. An  
emergency stop diagnostic enters the  
human interface and the unit will require  
a manual reset. Refer to the unit wiring  
diagrams (attached to the unit control  
panel for the proper connection  
11.89  
Table O-GI-3. RTM setpoint analog inputs  
terminals. The switch must be rated for  
12 ma @ 24 VDC minimum. This input  
will override all VOM inputs, if the VOM  
option is on the unit.  
cooling or heating setpoint input, °F  
(using RTM as zone temp. source)  
ohms  
cooling setpoint input, °F  
(using RTM as supply air temp. source)  
resistance, Ω  
1084  
40  
45  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
NA  
N A  
40  
45  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
9 0  
992  
899  
796  
695  
597  
500  
403  
305  
208  
111  
VAV Box Option  
To interlockVAV box operation with  
evaporator fan and heat/cool modes,  
wire theVAV boxes/air valves toVAV box  
control connections on the terminal block.  
Supply Duct Static Pressure Control  
The RTM relies on input from the duct  
pressure transducer when a unit is  
equipped with IGV or VFD to position the  
IGV or set the supply fan speed to  
maintain the supply duct static pressure  
to within the static pressure setpoint  
deadband.  
Table O-GI-4. RTM resistance value vs. system operating mode  
resistance  
applied to RTM mode  
input terminals, ohms  
CV units  
VAV units  
system mode  
fan mode  
auto  
auto  
auto  
on  
system mode  
off  
RTM Sensors  
2320  
4870  
7680  
10,770  
13,320  
16,130  
19,480  
27,930  
off  
RTM sensors include: zone sensors with  
or without setpoint inputs and modes,  
supply air sensor, duct static pressure,  
outside air temperature, outside air  
humidity, airflow proving, and dirty filter.  
cool  
auto  
off  
cool  
auto  
heat  
heat  
auto  
on  
on  
auto  
on  
Note: Mode boundaries are 1000 to 40,000 ohms. Other boundaries are equal to the midpoint between the  
nominal mode resistance.  
72  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
Compressor Module (MCM -  
Standard on all Units  
Waterside Module - Standard  
on all water-cooled units  
The waterside module (WSM) controls all  
water valves based on unit configuration.  
In addition, the WSM monitors waterflow  
proving and the following temperatures:  
• entering water  
• entering air low  
• mixed air  
• entering condenser water  
• refrigerant circuit 3:  
activates, the one with the highest priority  
(VOM “A”) begins first, with VOM “E”  
having lowest priority and beginning last.  
The compressor module, (single circuit  
and multiple circuit) energizes the  
appropriate compressors and condenser  
fans upon receiving a request for  
mechanical cooling. It monitors the  
compressor operation through feedback  
information it receives from various  
protection devices.  
A description of the VOM binary inputs  
follows below.  
UNIT OFF sequence “A”  
When complete system shut down is  
required, the following sequence can be  
used.  
• Supply fan – off  
• Supply fan VFD – off (0 Hz)  
• Inlet guide vanes – closed  
• Outside air dampers – closed  
• Heat – all stages – off, modulating heat  
output at 0 vdc  
• saturated condenser  
• evaporator frost  
• motor winding  
Human Interface Module -  
Standard on all Units  
• refrigerant circuit 4:  
The human interface (HI) module enables  
the operator to adjust the operating  
parameters for the unit using it's 16-key  
keypad on the human interface panel.  
The HI panel provides a two line, 40  
character, clear language (English,  
Spanish, or French) LCD screen with unit  
status information and menus to set or  
modify operating parameters. It is  
mounted in the units main control panel  
and accessible through the units control  
panel door.  
• condenser  
• Occupied/Unoccupied output – de-  
energized  
• VO relay – energized  
• Exhaust fan (field-installed) - off  
• Exhaust damper (field-installed) - closed  
• evaporator  
• motor winding  
CoolingTower Interlock  
To interlock condenser pump/tower with  
cooling operation, wire the cooling tower  
to an external 115 volt control power  
source, to ground, and to control terminal  
block. Normally open/closed contacts are  
provided.  
PRESSURIZE sequence “B”  
This override sequence can be used if a  
positively pressured space is desired  
instead of a negatively pressurized space.  
• Supply fan – on  
• Supply fan VFD – on (60 Hz)  
• Inlet guide vanes/VAV boxes – open  
• Outside air dampers – open  
• Heat – all stages – off, hydronic heat  
output at 0 vdc  
• Occupied/ unoccupied output -  
energized  
• VO relay - energized  
• Exhaust fan (field-installed) - off  
• Exhaust damper (field-installed) - closed  
Heat Module  
Remote Human Interface  
Module Option  
The optional remote-mount human  
interface (RHI) panel has all the functions  
of the unit-mounted version except for  
service mode.To use a RHI, the unit must  
be equipped with an optional  
interprocessor communications bridge  
(IPCB). Model number digit 32 (=2)  
indicates if the ICPB was ordered with the  
unit. If not, contact your localTrane  
representative to order an ICPB kit for  
field installation. The RHI can be located  
up to 1,000 feet (304.8 m) from the unit. A  
single RHI can monitor and control up to  
four self-contained units if each one  
contains an IPCB. The IPCB switches must  
be set as SW1- off, SW2 - off, and SW3 -  
on.  
The heat module is standard on all units  
with factory-installed heat. It controls the  
unit heater to stage up and down to bring  
the temperature in the controlled space  
to within the applicable heating setpoint.  
Also, it includes a freezestat, morning  
warmup, and heating outputs.  
EXHAUST sequence “C”  
Ventilation Override Module  
(VOM) Option  
With the buildings exhaust fans running  
and the units supply fan off, the  
conditioned space becomes negatively  
pressurized. This is desirable for clearing  
the area of smoke when necessary; i.e.  
from an extinguished fire, to keep smoke  
out of areas that were not damaged.  
• Supply fan – off  
The ventilation override module can be  
field-configured with up to five differnent  
override sequences for ventilation  
override control purpose. When any one  
of the modules five binary inputs are  
activated, it will initiate specified functions  
such as; space pressurization, exhaust,  
purge, purge with duct pressure control,  
and unit off.  
• Supply fan VFD – off (0 Hz)  
• Inlet guide vanes – closed  
• Outside air dampers – closed  
• Heat – all stages – off, hydronic heat  
output at 0 vdc  
• Occupied/Unoccupied output – de-  
energized  
• VO relay – energized  
• Exhaust fan (field-installed) - on  
• Exhaust damper (field-installed) - open  
Interprocessor Communications Board •  
Option used with RHI  
Once the ventilation sequences are  
configured, they can be changed unless  
they are locked using the HI. Once locked,  
the ventilation sequences cannot be  
unlocked.  
The interprocessor communication board  
expands communications from the unit's  
UCM network to a remote human  
interface panel. DIP switch settings on the  
IPCB module for this application are;  
switches 1 and 2 “off,” switch 3 “on.”  
The compressors and condenser fans  
disable during the ventilation operation. If  
more than one ventilation sequence  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
PURGE sequence “D”  
This sequence can purge the air out of a  
building before coming out of unoccupied  
mode of operation in aVAV system. Also,  
it can be used to purge smoke or stale air.  
• Supply fan – on  
• Supply fan VFD – on (60 hz)  
• Inlet guide vanes/VAV boxes – open  
• Outside air damper – open  
• Heat – all stages – off, modulating heat  
output at 0 vdc  
• Occupied/Unoccupied output –  
energized  
• VO relay – energized  
• Exhaust fan (field-installed) - on  
• Exhaust damper (field-installed) - open  
Exhaust/Comparative  
Ventilation Control Module  
(VCM) - Available only with  
Traq™ Damper Option  
Enthalpy (ECEM ) Module -  
Option used on units with  
comparative enthalpy option  
The ventilation control module (VCM) is  
located in the airside economizer section  
of the unit and linked to the units UCM  
network. Using a velocity pressure  
transducer/solenoid (pressure sensing  
ring) in the fresh air section allows the  
VCM to monitor and control fresh air  
entering the unit to a minimum airflow  
setpoint. See Figure O-GI-2 for a detail  
view of the velocity pressure transducer/  
solenoid assembly.  
The exhaust/comparative enthalpy  
module receives information from the  
return air humidity sensor, and the RTM  
outside air temperature sensor and  
outside air humidity sensor, the outside  
air humidity sensor and temperature  
sensor to utilize the lowest possible  
enthalpy level when considering  
economizer operation. In addition, it  
receives space pressure information to  
maintain the space pressure within the  
PURGE with duct pressure control “E”  
This sequence can be used when supply  
air control is required for smoke control.  
• Supply fan – on  
• Supply fan VFD – on (if equipped)  
• Inlet guide vanes – controlled by supply  
air pressure control function with  
supply air pressure high limit disabled  
• Outside air dampers – open  
• Heat – all stages – off, hydronic heat  
output at 0 vdc  
• Occupied/unoccupied output – energized  
• VO relay – energized  
An optional temperature sensor can be  
connected to the VCM to enable control  
of a field installed fresh air preheater.  
Also, a field-provided CO2 sensor can be  
connected to the VCM to control CO2  
reset. The reset function adjusts the  
minimum cfm upward as the CO2  
concentrations increase. The maximum  
effective (reset) setpoint value for fresh  
air entering the unit is limited to the  
systems operating cfm.Table O-GI-5 lists  
the minimum outside air cfm vs. input  
voltage.  
• Exhaust fan (field-installed) - on  
• Exhaust damper (field-installed) - open  
Figure O-GI-1. ECEM relative humidity vs.  
voltage  
Note: Each system (cooling, exhaust,  
supply air, etc.) within the unit can be  
redefined in the field for each of the five  
sequences, if required. Also the definitions  
of any or all of the five sequences may be  
locked into the software by simple key  
strokes at the human interface panel. Once  
locked into the software, the sequences  
cannot be changed.  
Table O-GI-5. Minimum outside air setpoint  
w/VCM module and Traq™ sensing  
Unit  
InputVolts  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
CFM  
SXWG 20  
SXWG 25  
SXWG 30  
SXWG 35  
SXRG 20  
SXRG 25  
SXRG 32  
6,350-8,500  
7,250-10,625  
7,250-12,750  
7,250-14,875  
7,250-8,500  
7,250-10,625  
7,250-13,600  
Trane IntelliPak Lon-Talk  
Communication Module (LCI-I  
Option used on units with  
Trane ICSTM or 3rd party  
Building AutomationSystems)  
The LonTalk Communication Interface  
module expands communications from  
the unit UCM network to aTraneTracer  
SummitTM or a 3rd party building  
automation system, utilizing LonTalk, and  
allows external setpoint and  
Figure O-GI-2.Velocity pressure transducer/  
solenoid assembly  
configuration adjustment and monitoring  
of status and diagnostics.  
74  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
Generic BuildingAutomation  
System Module Option  
Any of the setpoint or output control  
parameters can be assigned to each of  
the four analog inputs on the GBAS  
module. Also, any combination of the  
setpoint and/or output control param-  
eters can be assigned to the analog  
inputs through the HI.To assign the  
setpoints apply an external 0-5 vdc  
signal:  
inhibit compressor and heater operation.  
This can be set at the HI using the setup  
menu, under the “demand limit definition  
cooling” and “demand limit definition  
heating” screens. A toggle switch, time  
clock, or building automation system  
control output can initiate demand  
limiting.  
The generic building automation system  
module (GBAS) provides broad control  
capabilities for building automation  
systems other thanTrane’sTracer  
system. A field provided potentiometer  
or a 0-5 vdc signal can be applied to any  
of the inputs of the GBAS to provide the  
following points:  
If the cooling demand limit is set to 50%,  
half of the cooling capacity will disable  
when the demand limit binary input  
closes. The heating demand limit defini-  
tion can only be set at 100%, unless the  
unit has field-provided two-stage electric  
heat. In that case, if the heating demand  
limit is set to 50%, half or one stage of  
heating disables when the demand limit  
binary input closes. If the demand limit  
definition is set to 100%, then all cooling  
and/or heating will disable when the  
demand limit input closes.  
1. directly to the signal input terminals, or  
2. to the 5 vdc source at the GBAS  
module with a 3-wire potentiometer.  
GBAS Analog Inputs  
Four analog inputs that can be configured  
to be any of the following:  
(1) occupied zone cooling  
(2) unoccupied zone cooling  
(3) occupied zone heating  
(4) unoccupied zone heating  
(5) SA cooling setpoint  
Note: There is a regulated 5 vdc output on  
the GBAS module that can be used with a  
potentiometer as a voltage divider. The  
recommended potentiometer value is 1000-  
100,000 ohms.  
(6) SA heating setpoint  
(7) space static pressure setpoint  
(8) SA static pressure setpoint  
The setpoints are linear between the  
values shown inTable O-GI-6 on page 66.  
ReferenceTable O-GI-7 on page 66 for  
corresponding input voltage setpoints.  
Following are formulas to calculate input  
voltage or setpoint. SP = setpoint, IPV =  
input voltage.  
GBAS Diagnostics (Binary Outputs)  
The GBAS can signal up to five alarm  
diagnostics, which are fully mappable  
through the setup menu on the HI. These  
diagnostics, along with the alarm output  
on the RTM, allow up to six fully  
GBAS Binary Outputs  
Five binary outputs to provide  
diagnostics, signaling up to five alarms.  
Each of the five (5) relay outputs can be  
mapped to any/all of the available  
diagnostics. Each output contains a dry  
N.O. and N.C. contact with aVA rating of 2  
amps at 24 VAC.  
If the setpoint range is 50-90°F:  
IPV = (SP - 50) (0.1) + 0.5  
SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.1] + 50  
mappable alarm outputs.  
Each binary output has a NO and NC  
contact with a rating of two amps at 24  
VAC.The five binary outputs are factory  
preset as shown on the unit wiring  
diagram (on the unit control panel door).  
However, these outputs can be field  
defined in a variety of configurations,  
assigning single or multiple diagnostics to  
any output.  
If the setpoint range is 40-90°F:  
IPV = (SP - 40)(0.8) + 0.5  
SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.08] + 40  
GBAS Binary Input  
One binary input for the self-contained  
unit to utilize the demand limit function.  
This function is operational on units with a  
GBAS and is used to reduce electrical  
consumption at peak load times. Demand  
limiting can be set at either 50% or  
100%. When demand limiting is needed,  
mechanical cooling and heating (with  
field-provided 2-stage electric heat only)  
operation are either partially (50%), or  
completely disabled (100%) to save  
energy.The demand limit definition is  
user definable at the HI panel. Demand  
limit binary input accepts a field supplied  
switch or contact closure. When the need  
for demand limiting has been  
If the setpoint range is 40-180°F:  
IPV = (SP - 40)(0.029) + 0.5  
SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.029] + 40  
If the static pressure range is 0.03-0.3  
iwc:  
IPV = (SP - 0.03)(14.8) + 0.5  
SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/14.8] + 0.03  
For a complete listing of possible diagnos-  
tics, see the IntelliPak Self-Contained  
Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01B-EN.  
For terminal strip locations, refer to the  
unit wiring diagram for the GBAS.  
If the static pressure range is 0.0-5.0 iwc:  
IPV = (SP)(0.8) + 0.5  
SP = [IPV/(0.8 + 0.5)]  
GBAS Demand Limit Relay (Binary Input)  
The GBAS allows the unit to utilize the  
demand limit function by using a  
discontinued, the units cooling/heating  
functions will again become fully enabled.  
normally open (N.O.) switch to limit the  
electrical power usage during peak  
periods. Demand limit can initiate by a  
toggle switch closure, a time clock, or an  
ICS control output. These contacts must  
be rated for 12 ma @ 24 VDC minimum.  
GBAS Communication (Analog Inputs)  
The GBAS accepts external setpoints in  
the form of analog inputs for cooling,  
heating, supply air pressure. Refer to the  
unit wiring diagram for GBAS input  
wiring and the various desired setpoints  
with the corresponding DC voltage  
inputs.  
When the GBAS module receives a  
binary input signal indicating demand  
limiting is required, a command initiates  
to either partially (50%) or fully (100%)  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
Table O-GI-6. GBAS analog input setpoints  
control parameter  
signal range  
setpoint range  
50 to 90°F  
occupied zone cooling setpoint  
(CV units only)  
0.5 to 4.5 vdc  
unoccupied zone cooling setpoint  
(CV and VAV)  
0.5 to 4.5 vdc  
50 to 90°F  
50 to 90°F  
50 to 90°F  
40 to 90°F  
40 to 180 F  
occupied zone heating setpoint  
(CV units only)  
0.5 to 4.5 vdc  
0.5 to 4.5 vdc  
0.5 to 4.5 vdc  
0.5 to 4.5 vdc  
unoccupied zone heating setpoint  
(CV and VAV)  
supply air cooling setpoint  
(VAV units only)  
supply air hydronic heating setpoint  
(VAV units only)  
space static pressure setpoint  
0.5 to 4.5 vdc  
0.5 to 4.5 vdc  
0.03 to 0.30 IWC  
0.0 to 5.0 IWC  
supply air pressure setpoint  
(VAV units only)  
Notes: 1. Input voltages less than 0.5 vdc are considered as 0.5 vdc input signal is lost, the setpoint will  
“clamp” to the low end of the setpoint scale. No diagnostic will result from this condition.  
2. Input voltages greater than 4.5 vdc are considered to be 4.5 vdc.  
3. The actual measured voltage is displayed at the HI.  
Table O-GI-7. GBAS input voltage corresponding setpoints  
temp.  
°F  
temp.  
°F  
temp  
°F  
temp  
°F  
volts  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1.0  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.5  
volts  
1.6  
1.7  
1.8  
1.9  
2.0  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
volts  
2.6  
2.7  
2.8  
2.9  
3.0  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
volts  
2.7  
2.8  
2.9  
3.0  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.6  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
76  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
Waterside Components  
range of water temperature rise through  
the condenser when entering fluid  
cooling. If the economizer is unable to  
maintain the supply air setpoint, the unit  
control module brings on compressors as  
required to meet the setpoint.  
Waterside components consist of water  
piping, water valves, water flow switch  
option, water cooled condensers (SXWF  
only), and the economizer option.  
temperature is less than 58°F (15°C). This  
option allows the compressor to operate  
with entering fluid temperature down to  
35°F (2°C). The minimum valve position  
to maintain minimum condenser flow  
rates is user-defined at the HI. This valve  
drives closed if the unit shuts down or if a  
power failure occurs.  
The waterside economizer includes a coil,  
modulating valves, controls, and piping  
with cleanouts. The coil construction is ½-  
inch (13 mm) OD seamless copper tubes  
expanded into aluminum fins. The  
evaporator and economizer coils share a  
common sloped (IAQ) drain pan. Drain  
pan options are either galvanized or  
stainless steel, and are insulated and  
internally trapped.  
Water Purge  
This user-definable feature allows the  
user to select a purge schedule to  
automatically circulate water through the  
economizer and condensers periodically  
during non-operational times. This allows  
fresh chemicals to circulate in waterside  
heat exchangers. This feature is on all  
units and is defined at the HI.  
Water Flow Switch Option  
A water flow switch is factory installed in  
the condenser water pipe within the unit.  
Whenever the flow switch detects a  
water flow loss prior to or during  
mechanical cooling, compressor  
operation locks out and a diagnostic code  
displays. If water flow is restored, the  
compressor operation automatically  
restores.  
The waterside economizer coil is avail-  
able with either a two or four row coil,  
with no more than 12 fins per inch. The  
tubes are arranged in a staggered  
pattern to maximize heat transfer.The  
coil has round copper supply and return  
headers with removable cleanout and  
vent plugs. The optional mechanical  
cleanable economizer has removable  
cast iron headers to allow easy mechani-  
cal cleaning of the tubes. The waterside  
working pressure is rated for 400 psig  
(2758 kPa).  
Water Piping Options  
Water piping is factory-installed with left-  
hand connections on units without a  
waterside economizer. Units can be  
ordered with either basic piping or  
intermediate piping. Also, units with  
waterside economizers can be set for  
either variable or constant water flow at  
the HI. See Figures O-GI-3, O-GI-4, and O-  
GI-5 for detailed piping configuration  
information.  
Water-Cooled Condensers  
Units that are set up for variable water  
flow will modulate a water valve to  
maintain a user-defined condensing  
temperature setpoint. Condensing  
temperature will be referenced utilizing  
factory installed sensors located at each  
condenser.  
With compatible piping configurations,  
the unit can be configured to provide:  
1. Constant water flow with basic or  
intermediate piping or  
2. Variable water flow (head pressure  
control) with intermediate piping only.  
Waterside Economizer Flow Control  
Units equipped with a waterside  
economizer can be set from the human  
interface panel for variable or constant  
water flow.  
Table O-GI-8. Condenser water piping  
connection sizes  
unit size  
inlet pipe  
2 1/2 NPT  
outlet pipe  
2 1/2 NPT  
Constant water flow is for condenser  
pumping systems that are not capable of  
unloading the water-pumping system.  
Variable water flow maximizes energy  
saving by unloading the water pumping  
system.  
SXWG 20, 25,  
Constant Water Flow  
30, 32, 35  
Two-way modulating control shutoff  
valves are wired, controlled, and installed  
in the unit. One valve is located in the  
economizers water inlet, and the other is  
in the condenser bypass water inlet.  
When the waterside economizer enables,  
the two-way valves modulate to maintain  
the discharge air temperature setpoint.  
As the economizer valve opens, the  
condenser bypass valve closes, and vice  
versa. Full water flow is always  
Waterside Economizer Option  
The waterside economizer option takes  
advantage of cooling tower water to  
either precool the entering air to aid the  
mechanical cooling process or, if the  
water temperature is low enough,  
Basic Water Piping  
This option is available on units without a  
waterside economizer and with  
condenser water applications above 54°F  
(12.2°C) that do not require condensing  
pressure control. Left hand water  
connections and piping are extended to  
the unit exterior. Manifold piping is  
factory installed.  
provide total system cooling. Waterside  
economizing enables when the units  
entering water temperature is below the  
unit’s entering mixed air temperature by  
a minimum of 4°F plus the economizers  
approach temperature. The approach  
temperature default is 4°F. Waterside  
economizing disables when the units  
entering water temperature is not below  
the units entering mixed air temperature  
by at least the water economizer  
maintained through the condensers. Both  
valves will close in the event of a power  
failure.  
Intermediate Water Piping  
Variable Water Flow  
This option provides condensing  
temperature control when the unit is  
configured (user defined at the HI) for  
variable water flow with or without a  
waterside economizer. A two-way  
modulating control valve is wired and  
installed in the unit to maintains a specific  
Two-way modulating control shutoff  
valves are wired, controlled, and installed  
in the unit. One valve is located in the  
economizers water inlet, and the other is  
in the condenser water inlet. When the  
economizer valve is active, the  
approach temperature. The approach  
temperature defaults to 4°F.The  
economizer acts as the first stage of  
condenser bypass valve closes. The  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
economizer valve modulates, thus water  
flow through the unit modulates. If the  
water is cool enough for economizing, but  
mechanical cooling is also required, the  
economizer valve fully opens to establish  
full water flow through the condensers.  
Whenever the water is too warm for  
economizing and there is a call for  
cooling, the economizer valve fully closes  
and the bypass valve fully opens,  
establishing full water flow through the  
condensers. Full water flow is always  
maintained through the condensers  
when mechanical cooling is required.  
Both valves close whenever cooling is  
not required, and in the event of a power  
failure.  
Condenser 1  
Condenser 1  
Condenser 2  
Condenser 2  
V2  
Figure O-GI-3. Basic water piping, constant  
water flow  
Figure O-GI-4. Intermediate water piping,  
variable water flow  
Condenser 1  
Condenser 2  
Economizer  
V1  
V2  
Figure O-GI-5. Intermediate piping with waterside economizer, variable or  
constant water flow  
78  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
UnitAirside Components  
A field installed indicator device may be  
wired to relay terminals to indicate when  
filter service is required. Contacts are  
rated at 115 VAC and are powered by a  
field supplied transformer.  
modes to prevent supply air duct  
overpressurization. However, if for any  
reason the supply air pressure exceeds  
the user-defined supply air static  
The units air delivery system consists of  
dampers, enthalpy switch option, airside  
economizer option, filters, low ambient  
sensors, and factory mounted single or  
double wall plenums.  
pressure limit set at the HI panel, the  
supply fan/VFD shuts down and the IGVs  
close. The unit will attempt to restart, up  
to three times. If the overpressurization  
condition still occurs on the third restart,  
the unit shuts down and a manual reset  
diagnostic sets and displays at the HI.  
Low Ambient Sensor (Air-Cooled Units)  
The low ambient sensor is field-installed  
on air-cooled units. Position it in a location  
subject to ambient temperatures only  
and not exposed to direct sunlight or  
exhaust fans.  
Supply Air Fan  
The unit has a single supply fan that runs  
at a constant speed. However, the fan  
may have the IGV or VFD option that  
modulates airflow based on supply air  
temperature control. Pressing the stop  
key on the HI will turn the supply fan off.  
The fan is on continuously when a CV unit  
is in occupied mode and except when a  
unit is in the night heat/morning warmup  
mode. During the night heat and setback  
mode the fan cycles on and off in  
Variable Frequency Drive Option  
The variable frequency drive (VFD) is  
driven by a modulating 0-10 vdc signal  
from the RTM module. A pressure  
transducer measures duct static  
pressure, and the VFD adjusts the fan  
speed to maintain the supply air static  
pressure within an adjustable user-  
defined range. The range is determined  
by the supply air pressure setpoint and  
supply air pressure deadband, which are  
set at the HI panel.  
The low pressure cutout initiates based  
on the ambient temperature. A time  
delay on the low pressure cutout initiates  
for ambient temperatures between 50  
(zero minutes) and 0°F (10 minutes). This  
helps to prevent nuisance low pressure  
cutout trips.  
response to a call for heat. SeeTable O-  
GI-9 for available fan horsepower.  
Inlet GuideVane Option  
Inlet guide vanes (IGV’s) are driven by a  
modulating 0-10 vdc signal from the RTM  
module. A pressure transducer  
Low Entering Air Temperature Sensor  
This is standard on all units with a  
hydronic coil or waterside economizer. It  
can also be ordered as an option.  
measures duct static pressure, and the  
IGVs modulate to maintain the supply air  
static pressure within an adjustable user-  
defined range. The range is determined  
by the supply air pressure setpoint and  
supply air pressure deadband, which are  
set through the HI panel.  
VFDs provide supply fan motor speed  
modulation. The drives will accelerate or  
decelerate as required to maintain the  
supply air static pressure setpoint.  
A thermostat limit switch is factory  
mounted on the unit’s entering air side  
with a capillary tube serpentine across  
the coil face. If the temperature falls  
below 35°F (2°C), the fan shuts down and  
the waterside economizer and/or  
hydronic heat valve options open to allow  
full water flow.The heat output also  
energizes. A manual reset is required.  
The low entering air temperature  
setpoint is adjustable at the HI.  
VFD with Bypass  
Bypass control is an option that provides  
full nominal airflow in the event of drive  
failure. The user must initiate the bypass  
mode at the HI panel. When in bypass  
mode,VAV boxes need to be fully open.  
The self-contained unit will control  
heating and cooling functions to maintain  
setpoint from a user-defined zone sensor.  
Supply air static pressure limit is active in  
this mode.  
IGV assemblies installed on the supply  
fan inlet regulate fan capacity and limit  
horsepower at lower system air require-  
ments. When in any position other than  
full open, the vanes pre-spin the air in the  
same direction as the supply fan rotation.  
As the vanes approach the full-closed  
position, the amount of “spin” induced by  
the vanes increases at the same time  
that intake airflow and fan horsepower  
diminish. The IGVs will close when the  
supply fan is off.  
High Duct Temperature Thermostat  
A factory-supplied temperature limit  
switch with reset element detects the  
supply air duct temperature. This sensor  
should be field-installed downstream  
from the unit’s discharge in the supply air  
duct. If the supply air duct temperature  
exceeds 240°F (115.6°C), the unit shuts  
down and displays a diagnostic. A  
manual reset is required at the unit. The  
high duct temperature can be adjusted at  
the thermostat.  
For more detailed information on VFD  
operation, reference the VFD technical  
manual that ships with the unit.  
Supply Air Static Pressure Limit  
Airside Economizer Option  
The opening of the IGVs andVAV boxes  
coordinate during unit startup and  
transition to/from occupied/unoccupied  
Units with the airside economizer option  
are equipped with the necessary control  
sequences to use outside air for the first  
Dirty Filter Sensor Option  
A factory installed pressure switch  
senses the pressure differential across  
the filters. When the differential pressure  
exceeds 0.9-inches (23 mm) WG, contact  
closure occurs and the HI will display a  
diagnostic. The unit will continue to run  
until you replace the air filters.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
stage of cooling, in occupied or  
source has lower enthalpy.This allows  
true comparison of outdoor air and return  
air enthalpy by measurement of outdoor  
air and return air temperatures and  
humidities. A factory-installed control  
board, with field-installed outside and  
return air temperature and relative  
humidity sensors, allows monitoring of  
outside and return air.  
module (VCM) utilizes the velocity  
pressure input, the RTM outdoor air  
temperature input, and the minimum  
outside air cfm setpoint to modify the  
volume (cfm) of fresh air entering the unit  
as the measured airflow deviates from  
setpoint.  
unoccupied mode and when ambient  
conditions are favorable for economizing.  
Inherent in the unit controller is the ability  
to suppress the setpoint below the  
normal unit setpoint. This allows the  
building to improve comfort levels when  
possible, and at the same time, optimize  
building mechanical cooling operation for  
peak operating efficiency. An outside air  
temperature and relative humidity  
sensor are provided to allow monitoring  
of reference enthalpy and are field  
installed.  
When the optional preheat temperature  
sensor is installed at the auxiliary  
temperature on the VCM and the preheat  
function is enabled, the sensor will  
monitor the combined (averaged) fresh  
air and return air temperatures. As this  
mixed air temperature falls below the  
preheat actuate temperature setpoint,  
the VCM activates the preheat binary  
output to control a field-installed heater.  
The output deactivates when the tem-  
perature rises 5°F above the preheat  
actuate temperature setpoint.  
Note: If comparative enthalpy is not  
ordered, the standard method is to  
compare outdoor air enthalpy with the  
fixed reference enthalpy. The reference  
enthalpy is set through the human interface  
panel.  
If the unit has the ECEM board, econo-  
mizer operation enables when the  
outside air enthalpy is less than 25 BTUs/  
lb. default (adjustable 19-28 BTU’s/lb).  
During occupied mode, the outside air  
damper opens to 15% (adjustable 0-  
100% at the HI) for ventilation purposes.  
Also, the ability to alter the outside air  
damper position to compensate forVAV  
supply air modulation is inherent in the  
unit controls, and can be enabled by the  
operator.  
Units with comparative enthalpy control  
are equipped with the necessary control  
sequences to allow using outside air for  
the first stage of cooling, in occupied or  
unoccupied mode and when ambient  
conditions are favorable for economizing.  
Inherent in the unit controller is the ability  
to suppress the setpoint below the  
normal unit setpoint. This allows the  
building to improve comfort levels when  
possible, and at the same time, optimize  
building mechanical cooling operation for  
peak operating efficiency.  
Using a field-installed CO2 sensor with  
CO2 reset enabled, as the CO2 concentra-  
tion increases above the CO2 reset start  
value, the VCM modifies the minimum  
outside air cfm setpoint to increase the  
amount of fresh air entering the unit. The  
setpoint adjusts upward until reaching the  
CO2 maximum reset value. The maxi-  
mum effective (reset) setpoint value for  
fresh air is limited to the systems  
If the unit does not have an ECEM board,  
it will economize when the O/A tempera-  
ture falls below the O/A economizer  
setpoint.  
Economizer operation enables when the  
outside air enthalpy is 3 BTu/lb less than  
the return air enthalpy. During occupied  
mode, the outside air damper opens to  
15% (adjustable 0-100%) for ventilation  
purposes. Also, the ability to alter the  
outside air damper position to compen-  
sate forVAV supply air modulation is  
inherent in the unit controls, and can be  
enabled by the operator.  
operating cfm. As the CO2 concentration  
decreases, the effective (reset) setpoint  
value adjusts downward toward the  
minimum outside air cfm setpoint. See  
Figure O-GI-6 for an airflow cfm vs. CO2  
concentration curve.  
The mixing box fabrication is galvanized  
steel. Opposed low leak damper blades  
are fabricated from galvanized steel and  
rotate on rustproof nylon bushings. A  
factory installed 24V modulating spring  
return actuator controls both damper  
positions.  
Standard Two-Position Damper Interface  
Units with the two-position damper  
interface are provided with a 0-10 VDC  
control output suitable for controlling a  
field-provided modulating actuator. In  
occupied mode, the output drives to the  
maximum position.  
When outdoor conditions are not suitable  
for economizer cooling, the enthalpy  
control disables the economizer function  
and permits the outdoor air damper to  
open only to the minimum position.  
The mixing box fabrication is galvanized  
steel. Opposed low leak damper blades  
are fabricated from galvanized steel and  
rotate on rustproof nylon bushings. A  
factory installed 24V modulating spring  
return actuator controls both damper  
positions.  
Airside Economizers withTraqTM Damper  
Outside air enters the unit through the  
TraqTM damper assembly and is  
measured by velocity pressure flow  
rings. The velocity pressure flow rings  
are connected to a pressure transducer/  
solenoid assembly, which compensates  
for temperature swings that could affect  
the transducer.The ventilation control  
On water-cooled units, compressor  
operation lockout will not occur at low  
ambient air temperatures. However,  
lockout will still occur via low condenser  
water temperature.  
Airside Economizer Interface  
Units with airside economizer interface  
are equipped with the necessary control  
sequences to allow using outside air for  
the first stage of cooling, in occupied or  
unoccupied mode and when ambient  
conditions are favorable for economizing.  
Inherent in the unit controller is the ability  
to suppress the setpoint below the  
The outdoor air dampers drive fully  
closed whenever the supply air fan is off,  
provided there is power to the unit.  
Comparative Enthalpy Control  
normal unit setpoint. This allows the  
building to improve comfort levels when  
possible, and at the same time, optimize  
building mechanical cooling operation for  
Comparative enthalpy controls the  
economizer operation and measures  
temperature and humidity of both return  
air and outside air to determine which  
80  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
peak operating efficiency. An outside air  
temperature and relative humidity  
sensor are provided for field installation  
to monitor reference enthalpy.  
Economizer operation enables when the  
outside air enthalpy is less than 25 BTu/lb  
(adjustable 19-28 BTu/lb.). During  
occupied mode, the outside air damper  
opens to 15% (adjustable 0-100%) for  
ventilation purposes. Also, the ability to  
alter the outside air damper position to  
compensate forVAV supply air  
modulation is inherent in the unit controls,  
and can be enabled by the operator. An  
analog 2-10 VDC output (adjustable (0-10  
VDC) is provided to modulate the field-  
provided 30 second damper actuators  
(adjustable 1-255 seconds).  
temperature and relative humidity  
sensors, are provided for monitoring  
outside and return air.The sensors are  
field installed. Economizer operation  
enables when the outside air enthalpy is  
3 BTUs/lb. less than the return air  
enthalpy. During occupied mode, the  
outside air damper opens to 15%  
(adjustable 0-100%) for ventilation  
purposes. Also, the ability to alter the  
outside air damper position to  
Air-Cooled Condensers  
Model SXRF units are designed for use  
with the remote air-cooled condenser,  
model CXRC. For more information, see  
the air-cooled condenser Installation,  
Owner, and Diagnostic Manual, CXRC-  
SVX01A-EN.  
Condenser fans will stage per a user-  
defined setting. If the condenser is  
equipped with head pressure control (air  
modulation on last stage of condenser  
capacity), the condenser airflow will  
modulate to maintain condensing  
temperature setpoint. Condensing  
temperature is determined by sensors  
located at each condenser coil.  
compensate forVAV supply air  
modulation is inherent in the unit  
controls, and can be enabled by the  
operator. An analog 2-10VDC output  
(adjustable (0-10 VDC) is provided to  
modulate the field-provided 30-second  
damper actuators (adjustable 1-255  
seconds).  
Airside Economizer Interface with  
Comparative Enthalpy  
Units with airside economizer interface  
and comparative enthalpy are equipped  
with the necessary control sequences to  
allow using outside air for the first stage  
of cooling, in occupied or unoccupied  
mode and when ambient conditions are  
favorable for economizing. Inherent in the  
unit controller is the ability to suppress  
the setpoint below the normal unit  
setpoint. This allows the building to  
improve comfort levels when possible,  
and at the same time, optimize building  
mechanical cooling operation for peak  
operating efficiency. A factory-installed  
control board, with outside and return air  
Figure O-GI-6. CO2 reset function, outside air vs. CO2  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
Input Devices and System  
Functions  
Following are basic input device and  
system function descriptions used within  
the UCM network on IntelliPak self-  
contained units. Refer to the unit wiring  
diagrams for specific connections.  
Compressor MotorWindingThermostats  
A thermostat is embedded in the motor  
windings of each compressor. Each  
thermostat opens if the motor windings  
exceed approximately 221°F.The  
will restart when the evaporator  
temperature rises 10°F above the coil  
frost cutout temperature and the  
minimum three minute off” time  
elapses.  
thermostat resets automatically when the  
winding temperature decreases to  
approximately 181°F. Rapid cycling, loss  
of charge, abnormally high suction  
temperatures, or the compressor running  
backwards could cause the thermostat to  
open. During a request for compressor  
operation, if the compressor module  
detects a problem outside of it's normal  
parameters, it turns any operating  
compressor(s) on that circuit off, locks  
out all compressor operation for that  
circuit, and initiates a manual reset  
diagnostic.  
Saturated CondenserTemperature  
Sensors  
The saturated condenser temperature  
sensors are analog input devices.They  
are mounted inside a temperature well  
located on a condenser tube bend on air-  
cooled units, and in the condenser shell  
on water-cooled units.The sensors  
monitor the saturated refrigerant  
temperature inside the condenser coil  
and are connected to the SCM/MCM for  
circuits 1 and 2 (air or water cooled), and  
WSM for circuits 3 and 4 (only water-  
cooled).  
Water Purge  
NOTICE  
ProperWaterTreatment!  
The use of untreated or improperly  
treated water in coils may result in  
scaling, erosion, corrosion, algae or  
slime. It is recommended that the  
services of a qualified water treatment  
specialist be engaged to determine what  
water treatment, if any, is required.Trane  
assumes no responsibility for equipment  
failures which result from untreated or  
improperly treated water or saline or  
brackish water.  
Low Pressure Control  
Low pressure (LP) control is  
Head Pressure Control  
Head pressure control is accomplished  
using two saturated refrigerant  
temperature sensors on air-cooled units  
and up to four sensors on water-cooled  
units.  
accomplished using a binary input device.  
LP cutouts are mounted on the suction  
lines near the compressors.The LP  
control contacts close when the suction  
pressure exceeds 27 4 psig. If the LP  
control is open when a compressor  
starts, none of the compressors on that  
circuit will operate.They are locked out  
and a manual reset diagnostic initiates.  
The LP cutouts open if the suction  
pressure approaches 7 4 psig. If the LP  
cutout opens after a compressor starts,  
all compressors operating on that circuit  
will turn off immediately and will remain  
off for a minimum of three minutes.  
During the unoccupied mode, water-  
cooled units will periodically circulate  
water through the condensers and  
waterside economizer if the user has  
enabled the purge function at the HI. The  
water purge function circulates water to  
introduce fresh water-treatment  
Air-cooled units: During a request for  
compressor operation when the con-  
densing temperature rises above the  
lower limit of the control band, the  
compressor module (SCM/MCM)  
sequences condenser fans on. If the  
operating fans cannot bring the condens-  
ing temperature to within the control  
band, more fans turn on. As the satu-  
rated condensing temperature ap-  
proaches the lower limit of the control  
band, fans sequence off. The minimum  
on/off time for condenser fan staging is  
5.2 seconds. If the system is operating at  
a given fan stage below 100% for 30  
minutes the saturated condensing  
temperature is above the efficiency  
check point setting, a fan stage will be  
added. If the saturated condensing  
temperature falls below the efficiency  
check point setting, fan control remains at  
the present operating stage. If the fan  
stage cycles four times within a 10  
minute period, the lower limit tempera-  
ture is redefined as being equal to the  
lower limit minus the temporary low limit  
suppression setting.The unit will utilize  
this new low limit temperature for one  
hour to reduce condenser fan short  
cycling.  
chemicals and help prevent water  
stagnation.The number of hours between  
each periodic purge, or purge duration, is  
user-defined at the HI between 1-999  
hours. If the periodic purge timer expires  
while the unit is in occupied mode, it will  
wait for the next available unoccupied  
time before initiating water purge.  
If the LP cutout trips four consecutive  
times during the first three minutes of  
operation, the compressors on that circuit  
will lock out and a manual reset diagnos-  
tic initiates.  
Contrary, if a request for cooling occurs  
during a purge sequence, purge will  
terminate and cooling will commence.  
Evaporator Temperature Sensor  
Frostat™  
The evaporator temperature sensor is an  
analog input device used to monitor  
refrigerant temperature inside the  
evaporator coil to prevent coil freezing. It  
is attached to the suction line near the  
evaporator coil with circuits 1 and 2  
connected to the SCM/MCM and circuits  
3 and 4 connected to theWSM.The coil  
frost cutout temperature is factory set at  
30°F. It is adjustable at the HI from 25-35°F.  
The compressors stage off as necessary  
to prevent icing. After the last  
Compressor Circuit Breakers  
The compressors are protected by circuit  
breakers that interrupt the compressor  
power supply if the current exceeds the  
breakers “must trip” value. During a  
request for compressor operation, if the  
compressor module (MCM or SCM)  
detects a problem outside of its normal  
parameters, it turns any operating  
compressor(s) on that circuit off, locks  
out all compressor operation for that  
circuit, and initiates a manual reset  
diagnostic.  
compressor stages off, the compressors  
82  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Operation  
Water-cooled: Units withoutWSE, the  
condenser valve modulates to maintain  
an average saturated condenser tem-  
perature. Units withWSE, if economizing  
and mechanical cooling is necessary the  
economize valve will sacrifice free  
cooling and modulate to maintain  
condensing saturated temperature. If not  
economizing, the condenser valve will  
modulate to maintain condensing  
saturated temperature.  
suited to maintain cooling requirements.  
It is mounted in the return air path and  
connected to the ECEM.  
If the LEATPD is on a unit with factory-  
installed heat, it is mounted in the heat  
section and connected to the heat  
module. If the entering air temperature to  
the heating coil falls to 40°F, the normally  
open contacts on the LEATPD close and  
cause the following events:  
a. the hydronic heat actuator fully opens.  
b. the supply fan turns off  
c. the outside air damper closes  
d. the SERVICE light at the remote zone  
sensor option turns on.  
Supply Fan Circuit Breaker, Fuses, and  
Overloads  
The supply fan motor is protected by  
either circuit breakers fuses or a  
combination of fuses and overloads,  
dependent upon unit configuration.  
Circuit breakers are used on units  
without aVFD.They will trip and interrupt  
the motor power supply if the current  
exceeds the breaker trip value.The RTM  
shuts all system functions off when  
detecting an open fan proving switch.  
Units with a VFD have fuses to protect  
theVFD and motor. Units with aVFD w/  
bypass have fuses to protect VFD circuit  
and overloads to protect the motor when  
in bypass.  
Water-cooled units without head pres-  
sure control will lock out mechanical  
cooling at entering condenser water  
temperatures below 54°F. Mechanical  
cooling will resume when the entering  
condenser water temperature exceeds  
58°F.  
e. a LEATPD diagnostic displays at the  
human interface panel.  
If the LEATPD is on a water-cooled unit  
without factory-installed heat, it is wired  
to the WSM. It will trip if the entering  
water temperature falls to 34°F, open the  
economizer valve, and energize the  
pump output.  
LowAmbient Control (Air-Cooled Units  
Only)  
The low ambient modulating output on  
the compressor module is functional on  
all units with or without the low ambient  
option. When the compressor module  
stages up to it's highest stage (stage 2 or  
3 depending on unit size), the modulating  
output is 100% (10 VDC). When the  
control is at stage 1, the modulating  
output (0-10 VDC) controls the saturated  
condensing temperature to within the  
programmable condensing temperature  
low ambient control point.  
Supply Air Temperature Low Limit  
The supply air temperature low limit  
function uses the supply air temperature  
sensor input to modulate the economizer  
damper to the minimum position if the  
supply air temperature falls below the  
occupied heating setpoint temperature.  
High DuctTempThermostat Option On  
Units with an LCI-I  
The high duct temperature thermostats  
are binary input devices used on units  
with aTrane communication interface  
module (Tracer/LCI-I).They provide a high  
limit unit shutdown and require a manual  
reset.The thermostats are factory set to  
open if the supply air temperature  
reaches 240°F, or the return air  
temperature reaches 135°F. Once tripped,  
the thermostat requires a manual reset.  
Reset by pressing the sensors reset  
button when the air temperature  
decreases approximately 25°F below the  
cutout point.  
Supply Air Temperature Sensor  
The supply air temperature sensor is an  
analog input device. It monitors the  
supply air temperature for supply air  
temperature control, supply air  
temperature reset, supply air  
temperature low limiting, and supply air  
tempering. It is mounted in the supply air  
discharge section of the unit and  
connected to the RTM.  
Low Ambient Compressor Lockout (Air-  
Cooled Units Only)  
The low ambient compressor lockout  
utilizes an analog input device. When the  
system is configured for low ambient  
compressor lockout, the compressors will  
not operate if the temperature of the  
outside air falls below the lockout  
setpoint. When the temperature rises 5°F  
above the lockout setpoint, the  
compressors will operate. The setpoint  
for units without the low ambient option is  
50°F. For units with the low ambient  
option, the setpoint is 0°F.The setpoints  
are adjustable at the human interface  
panel.  
Filter Switch  
The filter switch is a binary input device  
that measures the pressure differential  
across the unit filters. It is mounted in the  
filter section and connected to the RTM. A  
diagnostic SERVICE signal displays at the  
remote panel if the pressure differential  
across the filters is at least 0.5” w.c.The  
contacts automatically open when the  
pressure differential across the filters  
decrease to 0.4” w.c.The switch  
Supply Airflow Proving Switches  
This is binary input device used on units  
to signal the RTM when the supply fan is  
operating. It is mounted in the supply fan  
section and is connected to the RTM.  
During a request for fan operation and if  
the differential switch opens for 40  
consecutive seconds, compressor  
operation turns off, heat operation turns  
off, the request for supply fan operation is  
turns off and locks out, IGV option closes,  
economizer damper option closes, and a  
manual reset diagnostic initiates.  
differential is field adjustable between  
0.17” to 5.0” w.c. 0.05 .  
ReturnAirTemperature Sensor  
The return air temperature sensor is an  
analog input device used with a return  
humidity sensor on units with the  
High Duct Static Switch Option  
The high duct static switch is field-  
mounted in the ductwork or plenums  
with smoke dampers. It will cause a  
manual reset diagnostic if the duct static  
exceeds the pre-set static limit.The static  
limit is adjustable at the HI.  
Low EnteringAir Protection Device  
(LEATPD)  
The low entering air protection device  
(LEATPD) is a binary input on units with  
hydronic heat or a waterside economizer.  
It is optional on water-cooled units.  
comparative enthalpy option.The sensor  
monitors the return air temperature and  
compares it to the outdoor temperature  
to establish which temperature is best  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sequence of  
operation  
Operation  
Control Sequences of  
Operation  
heating setpoint and higher cooling  
setpoint). Setpoints can be programmed  
at the HI,Tracer Summit, or the night  
setback zone sensor.  
Occupied/Unoccupied Switching  
There are four ways to switch occupied/  
unoccupied:  
The unit enters the unoccupied mode  
when the RTM receives a closed signal  
on the unoccupied input for more than  
five seconds.  
(1) Night setback zone sensor  
(2) Field-supplied contact closure  
(hardwired binary input to RTM)  
(3)Tracer Summit  
For units with supply air temperature  
control entering unoccupied mode, the  
following sequence will occur:  
• Heating/cooling functions cease and the  
economizer option closes fully.The  
supply fan shuts down for proper cool-  
down time of the heat exchanger.  
However, the supply fan may remain  
on for a short period of time.  
• After the supply fan shuts down, the  
occupied/unoccupied relay energizes  
and the IGV option fully opens. Also, the  
VAV box stroke time begins.TheVAV  
box stroke time is field adjustable to  
allow time forVAV boxes to go to the  
full open airflow position.  
(4) Factory-mounted time clock  
Field Supplied Occupied/Unoccupied  
Input on the RTM  
This input accepts a field supplied switch  
or contacts closure, such as a time clock,  
with a rating of 12 mA at 24 VDC  
minimum.  
Tracer Summit System  
TheTracer Summit system can control  
the occupied/unoccupied status of the  
self-contained unit.  
Factory MountedTime Clock  
A time clock can control the  
occupied/unoccupied status of the  
self-contained unit.  
• After the maxVAV box stroke time  
expires and the IGVs are fully open, the  
supply fan, economizer (if enabled),  
compressors, and heat are enabled to  
satisfy the unoccupied zone  
Unoccupied Sequence of  
Operation  
The unoccupied mode helps conserve  
energy during times when a building is  
usually unoccupied. When in unoccupied  
mode, the unit will control to the  
temperature setpoints.  
Note: Unoccupied economizer operation  
can be enabled or disabled at the HI or  
using Tracer Summit.  
unoccupied setpoints (usually a lower  
Figure O-SO-1.Typical cycling morning warmup cycle  
84  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sequence of  
operation  
Operation  
For units without volume control entering  
unoccupied mode, the following se-  
quence will occur:  
is reached. Next a 60 minute timer  
begins. If the building load reaches the  
MWU ventilation setpoint, or the 60  
minutes expire, whichever is first, the  
airside economizer will control to the  
minimum position. MWU will end when  
the zone temperature rises above the  
MWU terminate setpoint.  
• The occupied/unoccupied relay ener-  
gizes and the economizer option fully  
closes.  
• The fan mode is set to auto and the unit  
will control to the unoccupied zone  
temperature setpoints.  
Timed Override Activation - ICS™  
This function is operational whenever the  
units RTM module is used as the zone  
temperature sensor source, which can be  
set at the HI panel. When this function is  
initiated by the push of the override  
button on the zone sensor, the unit will  
switch to the occupied mode. Unit  
operation (occupied mode) during timed  
override is terminated by a signal from  
Tracer.  
With MWU enabled at the HI, if the zone  
temperature is below the MWU setpoint,  
the unit enters the MWU mode.  
Morning Warmup  
This feature can be enabled at the HI, and  
can be used with factory or field-installed  
heat. If MWU is not required disable the  
function in the setup menu at the HI.  
MWU transitions the zone from  
unoccupied to occupied. It will heat until  
the MWU setpoint is met. The unit is then  
released to occupied mode. Supply duct  
static pressure is maintained during this  
sequence. MWU can be set (at the HI) to  
function as either full or cycling capacity.  
Timed OverrideActivation - Non-ICS  
This function is active whenever the units  
RTM module board is selected as the  
zone temperature source, which can be  
set at the human interface panel. When  
this function is initiated by the push of the  
override button on the zone sensor, the  
unit will switch to the occupied mode.  
Automatic cancellation of the timed  
override mode occurs after three hours  
of operation.  
Full Capacity Morning Warmup (MWU)  
Full capacity morning warmup uses full  
heating capacity to heat the zone as  
quickly as possible. Full heating capacity  
is provided until the morning warmup  
setpoint is met. At this point, the unit is  
released to daytime mode.  
VAV Drive Max Output  
This is a single-pole, double-throw relay  
rated at a maximum voltage of 24 vac,  
two amps max. The relay contacts of this  
relay switch when the unit goes from the  
occupied mode to the unoccupied mode  
by means of the unoccupied binary input,  
night setback zone sensor, orTracer  
Summit. The contacts will stay switched  
during the unoccupied and morning  
warmup mode. They will return to the  
position shown on the unit wiring  
diagram when the unit returns to the  
occupied mode. The intent of this binary  
output is to signal theVAV boxes or other  
terminal devices to go to a full open  
airflow position.  
Cycling Capacity Morning Warmup  
(MWU)  
Cycling capacity morning warmup  
provides a more gradual heating to  
overcome “building sink” as the zone is  
heated. Normal zone temperature control  
with varying capacity is used to raise the  
zone temperature to the MWU zone  
temperature setpoint. This method of  
warmup is used to overcome the  
“building sink” effect.  
Reference Figure O-SO-1 on page 73 for  
a pictorial explanation of the cycling  
MWU sequence. Cycling capacity MWU  
will heat until MWU temperature setpoint  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sequence of  
operation  
Operation  
Occupied Sequence  
Cooling  
with the highest priority attempts cooling  
first. Once it is operating at its maximum,  
and if additional cooling is necessary, the  
other economizer enables before  
Upon entering occupied mode, the RTM  
receives an input from either the HI, RHI,  
Tracer Summit, or the GBAS to start the  
supply fan. The RTM supply fan contacts  
close and energize the supply fan  
All setpoints can be adjusted using the HI  
panel. Also, cooling/heating setpoints can  
be adjusted in the zone, if using one of the  
zone sensor options (BAYSENS020,  
BAYSENS021, BAYSENS108,  
mechanical cooling begins.  
Cooling/Waterside Economizer  
Waterside economizing enables when  
the units entering water temperature is  
below the units entering mixed air  
temperature by 4°F plus the user  
adjustable economizer approach  
temperature. The approach temperature  
default is 4°F.  
contactor. OnVAV units with IGV, the fan  
delays until the IGV fully close. When the  
supply fan starts, the fan proving switch  
closes, signaling the RTM that airflow is  
established. Depending on unit options,  
either the IGV will begin to drive open, the  
VFD will ramp the fan, and/or the airside  
economizer dampers will open to the  
user-defined minimum position.  
BAYSENS110, BAYSENS019, or  
BAYSENS074). For a complete list of unit  
setpoint default values and ranges, see  
the IntelliPakSelf-Contained  
Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01B-EN.  
Occupied ZoneTemperature - Cooling  
The unit transitions from unoccupied to  
occupied when the occupied/unoccupied  
input on the RTM is open for more than  
five seconds after having been closed.  
This input can be received fromTracer  
Summit, the remote NSB zone sensor,  
the timed override function, or a field  
supplied contact. Dependent on unit  
options and the HI programming, the  
following sequence will occur:  
• The unit will begin MWU and then  
switch to the occupied mode after the  
MWU setpoint is met.  
• Purge will be enabled byTracer Summit.  
ThenTracer Summit will enable the  
occupied mode.  
Waterside economizing disables when  
the units entering water temperature is  
not below the units entering mixed air  
temperature by at least the water  
economizer approach temperature  
(default value of 4°F). The economizer  
acts as the first stage of cooling. If the  
economizer is unable to maintain the  
zone (CV units) or supply air (VAV units)  
temperature setpoint, the compressor  
module will bring on compressors as  
required to meet the setpoint.  
When a cooling request is sent to the  
RTM from the zone sensor, the RTM  
evaluates the system operating condi-  
tions using the supply air and outdoor  
temperature input before sending the  
request to the MCM for mechanical  
cooling. If outdoor conditions (tempera-  
ture and humidity) are suitable or the  
EWT is within specified setpoints, the  
RTM will attempt to use “free cooling”  
without using any compressors. The RTM  
will use either the airside or waterside  
economizer option. When outdoor air  
conditions are not suitable, only mechani-  
cal cooling will function and outside air  
dampers will remain at their minimum  
position. If the unit does not have an  
economizer, mechanical cooling will  
operate to satisfy cooling requirements.  
Cooling/Airside Economizer  
On units with an airside economizer, a call  
for cooling will modulate the fresh air  
dampers open. The rate of economizer  
modulation is based on deviation of the  
zone temperature from setpoint; i.e., the  
further away from setpoint, the faster the  
fresh air damper will open. The first stage  
of cooling will start after the economizer  
reaches full open.  
• The unit will switch from unoccupied to  
occupied control immediately.  
Upon entering occupied mode,the IGV  
option will close while the supply fan  
remains on. The occupied/unoccupied  
relay will de-energize.  
Units With Economizer  
If the entering condenser water  
temperature (units with a WSE) or the  
outside air enthalpy (units with an ASE) is  
appropriate to use “free cooling,” the  
economizer will attempt to satisfy the  
cooling zone temperature setpoint.  
Zone Temperature Control  
(Unit Model Number Digit 9 = 4 or 5)  
A zone sensor located directly in the  
space sends input to the RTM while the  
CV unit is in occupied cooling mode.  
When the unit is in occupied cooling, the  
RTM controls the zone temperature  
within the cooling setpoint deadband by  
modulating the economizer option and/or  
staging mechanical cooling on and off as  
required.  
Note: The airside economizer will only  
function freely if ambient conditions are  
below the enthalpy control settings or  
below the return air enthalpy if unit has  
comparative enthalpy installed. If outside  
air is not suitable for “economizing,” the  
fresh air dampers drive to the minimum  
open position. A field adjustable, factory  
default setting at the HI panel or Tracer  
Summit can provide the input to establish  
the minimum damper position.  
Note: When using an ASE with economizer  
enabled, O/A temperature enable can be  
used instead of comparative enthalpy if the  
O/A temperature falls below the economizer  
setpoint.  
Supply AirTemperature Control  
(Unit Model Number Digit 9 = 1, 2, 3, or 6)  
When theVAV unit is in occupied cooling,  
the RTM controls the supply air  
Then compressors will stage on as  
necessary to maintain supply air tem-  
perature setpoint, which is user-defined  
at the HI. Minimum on/off timing of  
compressors prevents rapid cycling.  
When outdoor air conditions are above  
the setpoint or comparative enthalpy  
control setting, only mechanical cooling  
will function and outside air dampers will  
remain at their minimum position.  
temperature to the specified supply air  
cooling setpoint by modulating the  
economizer option and/or staging  
mechanical cooling on and off as  
required. The changeover relay contacts  
(field supplied) must be open on units  
with hydronic heat for cooling to operate.  
When both airside and waterside  
economizers are on a single unit, priority  
must be set at the HI. The economizer  
86  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sequence of  
operation  
Operation  
Mechanical Cooling  
Hydronic Heat: HotWater or Steam  
On units with hot water or steam heating,  
the zone temperature can be controlled  
to a heating setpoint during the occupied  
mode. The zone temperature heating  
setpoint and deadband are user defined  
at the HI panel or zone sensor.VAV  
occupied heating initiates by closing a  
field-supplied switch or relay contacts  
connected to the changeover input on the  
RTM. Supply air static pressure is  
maintained.  
SupplyAirTempering (HotWater and  
SteamVAV Units Only)  
When supply air temperature falls below  
the supply air temperature deadband low  
end, the heating valve modulates open to  
maintain the minimum supply air  
temperature setpoint.  
If the zone temperature cannot be  
maintained within the setpoint deadband  
using the economizer option or if there is  
no economizer, the RTM sends a cooling  
request to the MCM. The compressor  
module checks the compressor  
protection circuit before closing stage  
one. After the first functional stage starts,  
the compressor module monitors the  
saturated refrigerant temperature and  
closes the condenser fan output contact  
when the saturated refrigerant  
Daytime Warmup (Units with Supply Air  
Temperature Control Only)  
During occupied mode, if the zone  
temperature falls to a preset, user-  
defined zone low limit temperature  
setpoint, the unit is put into daytime  
warmup. The system changes over to CV  
heating, theVAV boxes drive full open.  
However, unit airflow modulation control  
operates to maintain duct static setpoint,  
and full heating capacity is provided until  
the daytime warmup setpoint is reached.  
The unit is then returned to normal  
occupied mode.  
SupplyAir Setpoint Reset (VAV Units  
Only)  
temperature rises above the lower limit  
setpoint.  
Supply air reset can be used to adjust the  
supply air temperature setpoint on the  
basis of a zone temperature or outdoor  
air temperature. Supply air reset  
adjustment is available at the HI panel for  
supply air heating and supply air cooling  
control.  
Air-Cooled Units Only  
The compressor module closes the  
condenser fan output contact when the  
saturated refrigerant temperature rises  
above the lower limit setpoint.  
Water-Cooled Units Only  
The WSM modulates the condenser coil  
water valves to maintain condenser  
temperature, if applicable. Otherwise, it  
will check the entering condenser water  
temperature to ensure it is greater than  
54°F or if not, it will lock out cooling.  
Reset based on outdoor air temperature  
Outdoor air cooling reset is sometimes  
used in applications where the outdoor  
temperature has a large effect on  
building load. When the outside air  
temperature is low and the building  
cooling load is low, the supply air setpoint  
can be raised, thereby preventing  
Supply AirTempering  
Supply air tempering is available on units  
without volume control and with hot  
water, steam, or electric heat or units with  
supply air temperature control with  
steam or electric heat. When the unit is in  
heat mode but not actively heating, if the  
supply air temperature drops to 10°F  
(5.5°C) below the occupied zone heating  
temperature setpoint, electric heat will  
stage on or the hydronic valve will  
modulate to maintain a minimum supply  
air temperature. The unit transitions out  
of heat mode if the supply air  
Auto Changeover (Units with Heat Only)  
When the system mode is in auto, the  
mode will change to cooling or heating as  
necessary to satisfy the zone cooling  
andheating setpoints. The zone cooling  
and heating setpoints can be as close as  
2°F (1.1°C).  
subcooling of critical zones. This reset can  
lower usage of mechanical cooling, thus  
savings in compressor kW, but an  
increase in supply fan kW may occur.  
Outdoor air heating reset is the inverse of  
cooling, with the same principles applied.  
Occupied ZoneTemperature - Heating  
Relies on input from a sensor directly in  
the space, while a system is in occupied  
heating mode or an unoccupied period, to  
stage electric heat on and off or modulate  
the hydronic heating valve as required to  
maintain the zone temperature within the  
heating setpoint deadband. The supply  
fan will operate when there is a request  
for heat.  
temperature rises to 10°F (5.5°C) above  
the occupied zone heating temperature  
setpoint.  
For both outdoor air cooling reset and  
heating reset, there are three user  
defined parameters that are adjustable  
through the human interface panel.  
• Beginning reset temperature  
• Ending reset temperature  
• Maximum amount of temperature reset  
Changeover  
This mode only functions on units with  
supply air temperature control with  
hydronic heat. When the changeover  
binary input is closed the unit will control  
to a discharge air heating setpoint. This  
setpoint is entered from the HI, and can  
be a higher temperature than the supply  
air cooling setpoint. This function  
maintains duct static pressure.  
Reset based on zone temperature  
Zone reset is applied to the zone(s) in a  
building that tends to overcool or  
overheat. The supply air temperature  
setpoint is adjusted based on the  
temperature of the critical zone(s). This  
can have the effect of improving comfort  
and/or lowering energy usage. The user-  
defined parameters are the same as for  
outdoor air reset.  
Electric Heat  
On units with electric heat, the zone  
temperature can be controlled to a  
heating setpoint during the occupied  
mode by cycling a single stage electric  
heater. An interface is provided for field  
supplied single stage electric heat. The  
zone temperature heating setpoint and  
deadband are user defined at the HI  
panel.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sequence of  
operation  
Operation  
Compressors  
compressors are manifolded together. If  
there are four compressors, the second  
two are manifolded.  
turned on as requested by the unit  
temperature control algorithm.  
Units use two sizes of hermetic scroll  
compressors, 10 and 15 hp, and can use  
from two to six compressors. When  
viewing the front of the unit, compressors  
are identified A through B from left to  
right. The second compressor from the  
left, or B compressor, is always the first to  
come on, unless locked out for a  
malfunction or shut off on frost protection.  
Refer toTable O-SO-1 for compressor  
cycling stages andTable O-SO-3 on page  
78 for percent cooling capacity by stage.  
Compressor Lead/Lag Operation  
Compressor lead/lag is a user-selectable  
feature at the HI panel and is available on  
all units. After each request for  
compressor operation, the lead  
refrigeration circuit or compressor  
switches, thereby causing a more  
equitable or balanced run time among  
compressors.  
Compressor Cycling  
Compressors cycle to maintain the  
operating state required by the  
temperature controls. In the event of a  
compressor failure, the next available  
compressor turns on. Refer toTable O-  
SO-1 for compressor cycling by unit  
model and tons.  
During normal conditions, compressors  
will not shut off until they have been on  
for at least three minutes and will not turn  
on until they have been off for at least  
three minutes. Normal operating condi-  
tions are established on an individual  
compressor basis. When a compressor  
starts, its timer also starts. The compres-  
sor evaporator circuit frost protection can  
override the “minimum” timer and  
reduce the five minute minimum re-  
quired time period.  
When lead/lag is enabled, each time the  
system cycles, it will alternate between  
the standard compressor staging and the  
lead/lag staging. UsingTable O-SO-1, a  
SXWG 30-ton unit will first stage com-  
pressor B then A, then AB for first cycle  
and A, then AB for the second cycle.  
Appropriate condenser valves (water-  
cooled and condenser fans (air-cooled)  
will stage with appropriate compressors  
to maintain saturated condensing  
The control system logic permits com-  
pressor operation only after the supply  
fan is on. If the supply fan shuts down,  
compressors will not operate. Units  
without head pressure control (units with  
intermediate piping packages) will lock  
out mechanical cooling when the entering  
condenser water temperature falls below  
54°F. Mechanical cooling will resume  
when the entering condenser water  
temperature exceeds 58°F.  
temperature. Enabling lead/lag may drop  
a cooling stage when compared to  
standard staging. SeeTable O-SO-1 for  
compressor staging.  
When the unit is powered up, or manually  
reset there will be a three to eight minute  
delay before the first compressor may be  
When there are more than two compres-  
sors in an air cooled unit, the first two  
Table O-SO-1. Compressor Stages.  
Unit  
Size  
Refrigerant  
Compressor HP  
by Stage  
Standard  
Lead/Lag  
SCM  
Circuit Type  
Compressor  
Compressor or  
Model # Digit 5  
A
B
Staging  
Staging  
A/AB  
MCM  
SXWG 20, 25  
SXRG 20  
SXWG 30  
SXRG 25  
SXWG 35  
SXRG 32  
Independent  
Independent  
Independent  
10  
10  
B/AB  
MCM  
MCM  
MCM  
15  
15  
10  
15  
B/A/AB  
B/AB  
A/AB  
A/AB  
88  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sequence of  
operation  
Operation  
Compressor Safety Devices  
A minimum time delay of five minutes  
follows each change in cooling level. This  
time delay promotes stability by allowing  
the system to respond to the change  
before any further control action occurs.  
As the supply air temperature ap-  
proaches setpoint, the time duration  
between changing levels of cooling  
capacity increases.  
Low Ambient Compressor Lockout  
This function will lock out the compressor  
if the outdoor air temperature sensor  
reads an outdoor temperature below the  
low ambient compressor lockout  
temperature setpoint. This setpoint is  
adjustable at the human interface panel.  
Compressors will lock out when outdoor  
air temperature falls below that selected  
temperature and will start again when  
the temperature rises 5°F above the  
setpoint.  
The compressors have motor  
temperature cutout switches in the motor  
windings. These switches are provided  
to take the compressors off line during  
high motor winding temperature  
conditions.  
If a compressor low pressure cutout  
opens during compressor start-up, the  
UCM will not shut the compressor off  
during the first two to three minutes after  
start-up. This prevents possible nuisance  
trips during low ambient start conditions.  
SeeTable O-SO-2.  
See Figure O-SO-2 for the typical unit  
operating curve. Figure O-SO-3 shows  
typical unit performance when supply air  
temperature swings exceed the control  
band limits.  
Evaporator Coil Frost Protection  
FROSTAT™  
Each compressors discharge line  
Adjust the supply air temperature control  
band according to the desired unit  
performance. Increasing the control band  
reduces the equipment cycle rate and  
increases the maximum potential supply  
air temperature deviation from setpoint.  
Conversely, decreasing the control band  
reduces the maximum potential tem-  
perature deviation, but increases the  
compressor cycle rate.  
The FROSTATsystem eliminates the  
need for hot gas bypass. It utilizes an  
evaporator temperature sensor mounted  
on the suction line near the TXV bulb of  
each circuit to protect the evaporator  
from freezing.  
contains a high pressure cutout. Under  
abnormal operating conditions, the cutout  
will open to stop compressor operation.  
Table O-SO-2. Pressure cutouts  
If the evaporator temperature ap-  
proaches the specified setpoint (adjust-  
able between 25 and 35°F at the HI) the  
compressor(s) will cycle off. The supply  
fan remains on to help de-ice the coil. The  
compressors will restart when the  
evaporator temperature has risen 10°F  
above the specified cutout temperature  
and when the compressor(s) have been  
off a minimum of three minutes. This  
prevents rapid cycling of the compres-  
sors.  
Unit  
High Pressure  
Cutout  
Low Pressure  
Cutout  
Model  
SXWF  
SXRF  
360/270  
405/350  
20/35  
12/27  
Follow these recommendations concern-  
ing the supply air temperature control  
band settings based on expected unit  
sizing:  
Step Control  
Steps of mechanical cooling are control  
based on supply air or zone temperature.  
SeeTable O-SO-1 for compressor  
staging.  
2 Cooling stage unit: 9°F  
3 Cooling stage unit: 7°F  
4 Cooling stage unit: 6°F  
Capacity is based on an integrating  
control concept. The unit capacity  
matches the existing load and maintains  
an average supply air temperature within  
the supply air setpoint temperature  
control band region.  
The supply air temperature control band  
is centered around supply air tempera-  
ture setpoint and is adjustable from 2 to  
12°F. In a steady state, the unit will either  
maintain a constant level of cooling  
capacity with the supply air temperature  
within the control band, or the highest  
active cooling level will cycle to provide  
an average supply air temperature equal  
to the setpoint.  
If the supply air temperature swings  
outside the limits of the control band, the  
mechanical cooling capacity will increase  
or decrease by one level accordingly.The  
change occurs by integrating the tem-  
perature offset from the control band  
limit.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sequence of  
operation  
Operation  
Service Valve Option  
If ordered, service valves are factory  
installed on each circuit before and after  
the compressor to allow compressor  
isolation for servicing.  
Figure O-SO-2.Typical pulldown curve for unit operating properly within control band  
Figure O-SO-3.Typical pulldown curve for unit operating improperly outside control band  
90  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
general  
information  
Maintenance  
Table M-GI-1. SCWG/SIWG/SCRG/SIRG General Maintenance Data  
Water-Cooled Units  
25  
Air-Cooled Units  
Unit Size  
20  
30  
35  
20  
25  
32  
Compressor Data  
Quantity  
NominalTon/Comp  
Circuits  
2
10  
2
2
10  
2
1/1  
10/15  
2
2
15  
2
2
10  
2
1/1  
10/15  
2
2
15  
2
EvaporatorCoilData  
Rows  
Sq. Ft.  
2
22.5  
144  
4
25.0  
144  
4
25.0  
144  
4
25.0  
144  
3
25.0  
144  
4
25.0  
144  
4
25.0  
144  
FPF  
CondenserData  
MiniumGPMw/oEcon  
MinimumGPMw/Econ  
MaximumGPM  
EvaporatorFanData  
Quantity  
36  
41  
80  
36  
41  
80  
46  
60  
54  
65  
102  
119  
2
125/8”x8"  
5
2
2
2
125/8 x11"  
5
2
125/8”x8"  
5
2
125/8”x9"  
5
2
125/ ”x11"  
85  
Size (Dia. x width - inches)  
MinimumHP  
125/8”x9"  
5
125/ ”x11"  
85  
MaximumHP  
MinimumDesignCFM  
MaximumDesignCFM  
R-22 Refrigerant Data  
EER  
20  
6350  
8500  
25  
7250  
10,625  
25  
7250  
12,750  
25  
7250  
14,875  
20  
7250  
8500  
25  
7250  
10,625  
25  
7250  
13600  
12.6  
13.2  
13.9  
14.1  
13.4  
12.9  
12.5  
12.2  
10.3  
11.4  
10.7  
11.4  
10.1  
10.4  
IPLV  
Refrigerant Charge - lbs.  
Circuit A  
Circuit B  
25  
25  
25  
25  
27  
25  
27  
27  
Capacity Steps - %  
407C Refrigerant Data  
EER  
100/53/0  
100/53/0  
100/65/47/0  
100/53/0  
100/52/0  
100/66/47/0  
100/52/0  
11.6  
12.3  
13.2  
13.5  
12.3  
12.2  
11.3  
11.5  
IPLV  
Refrigerant Charge - lbs  
Circuit A  
Circuit B  
23.5  
23.5  
23.5  
23.5  
26.5  
23.5  
26.5  
26.5  
Capacity Steps - %  
Filter Data  
Quantity  
Size (inches)  
Quantity  
Size (inches)  
CCRC/CIRC Condenser Match  
100/53/0  
100/53/0  
100/65/42/6  
100/53/0  
4
4
4
4
4
16x25x2  
4
20x25x2  
20  
4
16x25x2  
4
20x25x2  
29  
4
16x25x2  
4
20x25x2  
32  
(16x25x2)  
(16x25x2)  
(16x25x2)  
(16x25x2)  
4
20x25x2  
4
20x25x2  
4
20x25x2  
4
20x25x2  
Notes:  
1. Compressors areTrane 3D® scroll.  
2. EER and IPLV are rated in accordance to theARI Standard 340/360-93 for large unitary equipment. Based on 80/67°F (26.7/19.4°C) to the evaporator coil, nominal airflow and 85-95°F (29.4-  
35°C) condenser water.  
3. All units operate with R-22. Units ships with full operating charge.  
4. Maximum cfm limits are set to prevent moisture carryover on the evaporator coil.  
5. Minimum cfm limits are set to ensure stable thermal expansion valve operation at low load conditions.  
6. Filter sizes are for units without hot water or steam heating coils  
Table M-GI-2. SCWG/SIWG/SCRG/SIRG Self-Contained Heating Coil Maintenance Data  
Filter Data for Heating Coil  
Quantity  
4
Size (inches)  
Size (mm)  
Quantity  
Size (inches)  
Size (mm)  
20x18x2  
(508x457x51)  
8
20x20x2  
(508x508x51)  
Coil Data  
Type  
Rows  
No. - Size (in)  
2 - 24 x 58  
No. - Size (mm)  
2 - 609.6x1473.2  
2 - 609.6x1473.2  
fpf  
42  
80  
Steam Coil  
Hot Water Coil  
NS  
1
1
WC  
2 - 24 x 58  
Notes: 1. Hot water and steam heating coils have Prima-Flo® fins and do not have turbulators. 2. For coil capacities, useTOPSS(Trane Official  
Product Selection Program). 3. Full capacity coils consist of two coils stacked and piped in parallel.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Maintenance Procedures  
of the unit.To replace throwaway filters,  
remove the dirty elements and install  
new filters with the filters directional  
arrows pointing toward the fan.Verify  
that no air bypasses the filters. See  
Figures O-M-1 and O-M-2 for proper filter  
placement.  
Air Filters  
Filter access doors are on the units left  
side. Filter access for the 2” filter rack on  
optional steam and hot water coils and  
airside economizers is also on the left side  
is this correct?  
without steam or hot water coil  
with steam or hot water coil  
16 x 20  
20 x 20  
16 x 20  
20 x 20  
16 x 20  
20 x 20  
16 x 20  
20 x 20  
18 x 20  
20 x 20  
18 x 20  
18 x 20  
20 x 20  
18 x 20  
18 x 20  
20 x 20  
18 x 20  
18 x 20  
20 x 20  
18 x 20  
18 x 20  
18 x 20  
18 x 20  
18 x 20  
Note: All filters are 2". These views are from the back of the unit (L-R).  
Note: All filters are 2". These views are from the back of the unit (L-R).  
Figure M-MP-1. Unit Filter Sizes and Placement for SXWG 20-38 tons or SXRG 20-40 tons  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy  
storing components provided byTrane  
or others, refer to the appropriate  
manufacturer’s literature for allowable  
waiting periods for discharge of capaci-  
tors.Verify with an appropriate voltme-  
ter that all capacitors have discharged.  
Failure to disconnect power and  
discharge capacitors before servicing  
could result in death or serious injury.  
Note: For additional information  
regarding the safe discharge of capaci-  
tors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-  
SVB06A-FR.  
92  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Inspecting and Cleaning the  
Drain Pan  
Check the condensate drain pan and  
drain line to ensure that the condensate  
drains properly at least every six months  
or as dictated by operating experience.  
5.Thoroughly clean the contaminated  
area(s) with a mild bleach and water  
solution or an EPA-approved sanitizer  
specifically designed for HVAC use.  
Carefully follow the sanitizer  
manufacturer’s instructions regarding  
product use.  
6. Immediately rinse the drain pan  
thoroughly with fresh water to prevent  
potential corrosion from the cleaning  
solution.  
7. Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before  
putting the system back into service.  
8. Properly dispose of all contaminated  
materials and cleaning solution.  
If evidence of standing water or conden-  
sate overflow exists, take steps to identify  
and remedy the cause immediately.  
Refer to the trouble shooting section of  
this manual for possible causes and  
solutions.  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
Inspecting and Cleaning the  
Fan  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
Inspect the fan section every six months  
or more frequently if operating  
experience dictates. Clean accumulated  
dirt and organic matter on the fan interior  
surfaces following the procedure below:  
1. Disconnect all electrical power to the  
unit.  
2. Wear the appropriate personal  
protective equipment (PPE).  
3. Use a portable vacuum with HEPA  
filtration to remove the loose dirt and  
organic matter.The filter should be  
99.97% efficient at 0.3 micron particle  
size.  
4. Thoroughly clean the fan and  
associated components with an  
industrial cleaning solution. Carefully  
follow the cleaning solution  
manufacturer’s instructions regarding  
personal protection and ventilation  
when using their product.  
5. Rinse the affected surfaces thoroughly  
with fresh water and a fresh sponge to  
prevent potential corrosion of metal  
surfaces.  
6. Allow the unit to dry completely before  
putting it back into service.  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
Clean drain pans using the following  
procedure:  
1. Disconnect all electrical power to the  
unit.  
2. Don the appropriate personal  
protective equipment (PPE).  
3. Remove all standing water.  
4. Use a scraper or other tools to remove  
and solid matter. Remove solid matter  
with a vacuum device that utilizes high  
efficiency particulate arrestance (HEPA)  
filters with a minimum efficiency of  
99.97% at 0.3 micron particle size.  
7. Properly dispose of all contaminated  
materials and cleaning solution.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)  
The VFD access panel is hinged to allow  
service access to the fan motor and belt  
drive components that are located behind  
it.To swing the panel open:  
• Remove the unit center cover panel to  
the left of the VFD panel.  
• Remove and discard the sheet metal  
shipping screws along the top and  
bottom edges of the VFD panel.  
• Disconnect the communications cable  
from the keypad on the VFD door panel.  
Turn the two slotted-head fasteners on  
the right edge of the VFD panel fully  
counterclockwise.  
each sheave and pull it tight for a center  
line. See Figure M-MP-6 for  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
recommended torques.  
4. Once the sheaves are properly aligned,  
tighten sheave set screws to proper  
torque. SeeTables M-MP-1 and M-MP-2  
for recommended torques.  
5. Check belt tension. Refer to the  
“Measuring BeltTension” section.  
6. If required, adjust belt to the minimum  
recommended tension. Refer to  
Adjusting BeltTension” section.  
7. Retighten bearing set screws to the  
proper torques after aligning the  
sheaves. SeeTables M-MP-1 and M-  
MP-2 for proper torques.  
8. Check the fan bearing locking collars  
for tightness on the shaft.To tighten the  
locking collar, loosen the set screw and  
slide the collar into its proper position  
over the extended end of the inner  
case.Tighten the set screw to the  
torque value inTables M-MP-1 and M-  
MP-2.  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
1. Rotate the fan wheel to ensure it turns  
freely in the proper direction and is not  
rubbing on the fan housing, inlet, or inlet  
guide vanes. If necessary, center the  
fan wheel again.  
2. Check the position of both shafts. Fan  
and motor shafts should operate  
parallel to each other for maximum belt  
and bearing life. Shim as necessary  
under the motor or fan bearings to  
obtain proper alignment.  
• Pull on the handle to swing the panel  
180°.  
To close and reattach the panel, reverse  
the procedures listed above.  
Note: To secure the panel in the open  
position during service procedures, attach  
the chain mounted to the cabinet frame  
behind the unit center cover panel to the  
chain retainer notch on the edge of the VFD  
panel.  
3. Check the fan motor sheave alignment  
with straight edge or a tightly pulled  
string. For sheaves of different widths,  
place a string in the center groove of  
9. During air balancing, verify the sheave  
alignment, belt tension, and that the  
shaft is parallel.  
Note: Verify that all wires are in their proper  
position and not rubbing before replacing  
the panel.  
Note: Panel weight rating = 225 lbs. total,  
including factory-installed components.  
Supply Fan  
Fan Drive  
Perform the following procedures  
according to the “Periodic Maintenance  
Check List.  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
Figure M-MP-4. Fan shaft and motor sheave alignment  
94  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Fan Bearings  
Table M-MP-1. Baldor Fan Bearing Lubrication Schedule  
The opposite drive end bearing is a  
special bearing with close tolerance fit of  
balls and races. Replace this bearing with  
the same part number as the original  
bearing. Follow the fan bearing  
lubrication schedules inTables M-MP-1  
and M-MP-2. UseTable M-MP-3 to  
reference compatible fan bearing grease  
for specific bearings.  
Baldor  
Rated Speed, rpm  
Nema/ (IEC) Frame Size  
up to 210 incl. (132)  
over 210 to 280 incl. (180)  
over 360 to 5800 incl. (300)  
3600  
1800  
1200  
900  
5500 hrs  
3600 hrs  
2200 hrs  
12,000 hrs  
9500 hrs  
3500 hrs  
18,000 hrs  
15,000 hrs  
7400 hrs  
22,000 hrs  
18,000 hrs  
10,500 hrs  
Table M-MP-2.AO Smith Bearing Lubrication Schedule  
Speed  
Service  
Frame  
Standard Service  
Severe Service  
Extreme  
Over 1800 rpm  
1800 rpm  
All  
6 mths  
3 yrs  
3 mths  
1 yr  
3 mths  
6 mths  
5 1/2 mths  
4 1/2 mths  
4 mths  
140-180  
210-280  
320-360  
400-440  
2 1/2 yrs  
2 yrs  
1 1/2 yrs  
10 1/2 mths  
9 mths  
8 mths  
Note: Service standard - 8 hrs/day, normal to lgith loading, 100°F ambient temp. max.  
Severe service - 24 hrs/day, shock loading, vibration, dirt or dust, 100 to 150°F ambient temp.  
Extreme service - heavy shock or vibration, dirt or dust, 100 to 150°F ambient temp.  
Table M-MP-3. Compatible Fan Bearing Grease  
Motor Vendor  
Recommended Oil  
AOSmith  
ExxonPolyrexEM  
Chevron SRI 2  
Dolium R Grease  
Chevron Black Perl EP1  
ExxonPolyrexEM  
Texaco Polystar  
Baldor  
RykonPremium#2  
PennzoilPen2Lube  
ChevronSRI  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Fan BeltTension  
Table M-MP-4. Fan shaft bearing torques  
setscrew  
size  
1/4"-20  
hex-size  
recommended torque  
Note: Check fan belt tension at least twice  
during the first days of new belt operation  
since there is a rapid decrease in tension  
until belts are run-in.  
across flats  
In-lb  
180  
402  
ft-lb  
15  
1/8"  
5-32"  
5-16"-18  
33.5  
Table M-MP-5. Fan hub and sheave torques  
Proper belt tension is necessary to  
endure maximum bearing and drive  
component life and is based on fan brake  
horsepower requirements. If frayed or  
worn, replace belts in matched sets.  
unit  
size  
SCWF 20  
SCWF 22  
SCWF 25  
SCRF 20  
SCWF 29  
SCWF 32  
SCRF 25  
SCRF 30  
SCWF 35  
SCWF 38  
SCRF 30  
SCRF 35  
SCWF 42  
SCWF 46  
SCWF 52  
SCWF 58  
SCRF 40  
SCRF 50  
SCWF 65  
SCWF 72  
SCWF 80  
SCRF 60  
SCWF 90  
SCWF C0  
SCWF C1  
fan  
setscrew torque  
dia.  
size  
(ft-lbs)  
12  
5
16.5"  
/
/
/
"
"
"
16  
16  
16  
5
5
18"  
12  
14  
24  
Measuring BeltTension  
Measure fan belt tension with a  
Browning, Gates, or equivalent belt  
tension gauge. Determine deflection by  
dividing the belt span distance (in inches)  
by 64. See Figure M-MP-6. Follow the  
procedure below to measure belt tension.  
20"  
25"  
3/8"  
1. Measure belt span between centers of  
sheaves and set the large “O” ring of  
the tensioning gauge at 1/64 inch for each  
inch of belt span.  
27"  
3/8"  
24  
Figure M-MP-5. Belt tension gauge  
2. Set the load “O” ring at zero.  
3. Place the large end of the gauge at the  
center of the belt span. Press down until  
the large “O” ring is even with the top  
of the belt line or the next belt as in  
Figure M-MP-6. Place a straight edge  
across the sheaves as a reference  
point. See Figure M-MP-4.  
deflection = belt span/64  
4. Remove the gauge. Note that the load  
“O” ring now indicates a number on the  
plunger scale. This number represents  
pounds of force required to deflect the  
belt.  
5. Check the reading from step 4 against  
the values given inTable M-MP-4. If  
necessary, readjust belt tension.  
Figure M-MP-6. Fan belt adjustment  
96  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Adjusting BeltTension  
NOTICE  
Do not over-tension belts. Exces-  
sive belt tension will reduce fan  
and motor bearing life, accelerate  
belt wear, and possibly cause  
shaft failure.  
To adjust belt tension refer to Figure M-  
MP-6 and perform the following  
procedure:  
1. Loosen bolts A, B, and E on both sides  
of the sliding motor base. See Figure M-  
MP-7.  
2. Loosen nuts C and D (as required for  
motor horsepower) to slide the motor  
on its mounting plate in the proper  
direction to tension or relieve tension on  
the belt.  
Figure O-M-5. Fan assembly.  
3. Adjust nuts A-D and bolt E. Do not  
stretch the belts over the sheaves.  
4. Retighten all nuts and bolts.  
5.Verify tension is adjusted properly.  
Recommended belt tension range values  
are on the unit fan scroll.To access the  
fan scroll, face the right-hand side of the  
unit and remove the top left panel. The  
belt tension label is on the top right-hand  
corner of the fan scroll. See Figures O-M-  
8 and O-M-9.  
The correct operation tension for aV-belt  
drive is the lowest tension at which the  
belt will not slip under the peak load  
conditions. It may be necessary to  
increase the tension of some drives to  
reduce flopping or excessive startup  
squealing.  
Figure M-MP-7. Belt tensioning with fan adjustment points  
Figure M-MP-8. Location of fan belt label on  
fan scroll  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Refrigerant System  
To assist in reducing power generation  
emissions, always attempt to improve  
equipment performance with improved  
maintenance and operations that will  
help conserve energy resources.  
ƽWARNING  
Special Note on Refrigerant Emissions  
Follow theTrane recommended  
procedures on operation, maintenance,  
and service to ensure refrigerant  
conservation and emission reduction.  
Also, pay specific attention to the  
following:  
• Whenever removing refrigerant from  
air conditioning or refrigerating  
equipment, recover for reuse, recycle,  
reprocess (reclaim), or properly destroy  
it.  
• Always determine possible refrigerant  
recycling or reclaiming requirements  
before beginning recovery. Questions  
about recovered refrigerants and  
acceptable refrigerant quality  
standards are addressed in ARI  
Standard 700.  
LeakTesting!  
Do not exceed 200 psig when leak  
testing system. Failure to follow these  
instructions could result in an explosion  
causing death or serious injury.  
ƽWARNING  
Confined Space Hazards!  
Do not work in confined spaces where  
sufficient quantities of refrigerant or  
other hazardous, toxic, or flammable gas  
may be leaking. Refrigerant or other  
gases could displace available oxygen to  
breathe, causing possible asphyxiation  
or other serious health risks. Some  
gases may be flammable and or explo-  
sive. Evacuate the area immediately and  
contact the proper rescue or response  
authority. Failure to take appropriate  
precautions or to react properly to a  
potential hazard could result in death or  
serious injury.  
In the event of required system repair,  
leak test the liquid line, evaporator coil,  
and suction line at pressures dictated by  
local codes, and using the following  
guidelines.  
1. Charge enough dry nitrogen into the  
system to raise the pressure to 100  
psig.  
2. Use a halogen leak detector, halide  
torch, or soap bubbles to check for leaks.  
Check interconnecting piping joints, the  
evaporator coil connections, and all  
accessory connections.  
3. If a leak is detected, release the test  
pressure, break the connections and  
reassemble it as a new joint, using  
proper brazing techniques.  
4. If no leak is detected, use nitrogen to  
increase the test pressure to 150 psig  
and repeat the leak test. Also, use soap  
bubbles to check for leaks when  
nitrogen is added.  
5. Retest the system to make sure new  
connections are solid.  
6. If a leak is suspected after the system  
has been fully charged with refrigerant,  
use a halogen leak detector, halide  
torch, or soap bubbles to check for leaks.  
• Use approved containment vessels and  
safety standards. Comply with all  
applicable transportation standards  
when shipping refrigerant containers.  
To minimize emissions while recovering  
refrigerant, use recycling equipment.  
Always attempt to use methods which  
will pull the lowest possible system  
vacuum while recovering and  
condensing refrigerant into  
ƽWARNING  
Hazard of Explosion!  
Use only dry nitrogen with a pressure  
regulator for pressurizing unit. Do not  
use acetylene, oxygen or compressed air  
or mixtures containing them for pressure  
testing. Do not use mixtures of a  
hydrogen containing refrigerant and air  
above atmospheric pressure for pres-  
sure testing as they may become  
flammable and could result in an explo-  
sion. Refrigerant, when used as a trace  
gas should only be mixed with dry  
nitrogen for pressurizing units. Failure to  
follow these recommendations could  
result in death or serious injury or  
containment.  
• Be aware of any new leak test methods  
which eliminate refrigerant as a trace  
gas.  
• When cleaning system components or  
parts, do not use CFC11 (R11) or  
CFC113 (R113). Refrigeration system  
clean up methods using filters and  
dryers are recommended. Do not use  
solvents which have ozone depletion  
factors. Properly dispose of used  
materials.  
Take extra care to properly maintain all  
service equipment directly supporting  
refrigerant service work such as  
gauges, hoses, vacuum pumps, and  
recycling equipment.  
• Stay aware of unit enhancements,  
conversion refrigerants, compatible  
parts, and vendor components and  
manufacturers recommendations that  
will reduce refrigerant emissions and  
increase equipment operating  
efficiencies. Follow specific  
Refrigerant Evacuation  
For field evacuation, use a rotary style  
vacuum pump capable of pulling a  
vacuum of 400 microns or less.  
When connecting the vacuum pump to a  
refrigeration system, it is important to  
manifold the pump to both the high and  
low side of the system. Follow the pump  
manufacturers directions.  
equipment or property-only damage.  
manufacturers guidelines for  
conversion of existing systems.  
98  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
refrigerant containers.  
NOTICE  
Motor Winding Damage!  
To minimize emissions while recovering  
refrigerant, use recycling equipment.  
Always attempt to use methods that  
will pull the lowest possible system  
vacuum while recovering and  
ƽWARNING  
LeakTesting!  
Do not use a megohm meter or apply  
voltage greater than 50 DVC to a  
compressor motor winding while it is  
under a deep vacuum.Voltage sparkover  
may cause damage to the motor  
windings.  
Do not exceed 200 psig when leak  
testing system. Failure to follow these  
instructions could result in an explosion  
causing death or serious injury.  
condensing refrigerant into  
containment.  
• Be aware of any new leak test methods  
that eliminate refrigerant as a trace gas.  
• When cleaning system components or  
parts, do not use CFC11 (R11) or CFC  
113 (R113). Refrigeration system clean-  
up methods using filters and dryers are  
recommended. Do not use solvents  
which have ozone depletion factors.  
Properly dispose of used materials.  
Take extra care to properly maintain all  
service equipment directly supporting  
refrigerant service work such as  
gauges, hoses, vacuum pumps, and  
recycling equipment.  
• Stay aware of unit enhancements,  
conversion refrigerants, compatible  
parts, and manufacturers  
recommendations that will reduce  
refrigerant emissions and increase  
equipment operating efficiencies.  
Follow specific manufacturer’s  
In the event of required system repair,  
leak test the liquid line, evaporator coil,  
and suction line at pressures dictated by  
local codes, using the following  
guidelines.  
1. Charge enough refrigerant and dry  
weight. Use an accurate scale or  
charging cylinder to determine the  
exact weight of the refrigerant entering  
the system. Failure to use either a scale  
or a charging cylinder can lead to  
undercharging or overcharging  
resulting in unreliable operation.  
Refrigerant Charging  
• R22 units  
After leak testing and evacuating the  
system, charge liquid refrigerant into the  
system through the liquid line valve. After  
some refrigerant has entered each  
circuit, charge gaseous refrigerant into  
the suction line shrader valve with the  
compressors running.  
R407c  
After leak testing and evacuating the  
system, charge liquid refrigerant into the  
system through the liquid line valve.  
NOTICE  
Compressor Damage!  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Pressures!  
Do not operate the compressors without  
some refrigerant in each circuit. Failure  
to do so may result in compressor  
damage.  
If a heat source is required to raise the  
tank pressure during removal of refriger-  
ant from cylinders, use only warm water  
or heat blankets to raise the tank  
temperature. Do not exceed a tempera-  
ture of 150°F. Do not under any circum-  
stances apply direct flame to any portion  
of the cylinder. Failure to follow these  
safety precautions could result in a  
violent explosion, which could result in  
death or serious injury.  
guidelines for conversion of existing  
systems.  
To assist in reducing power generation  
emissions, always attempt to improve  
equipment performance with improved  
maintenance and operations that will  
help conserve energy resources.  
Special Note on Refrigerant Emissions  
Follow theTrane recommended  
procedures on operation, maintenance,  
and service to endure refrigerant  
conservation and emission reduction.  
Also, pay specific attention to the  
following:  
Refrigerant LeakTesting  
It is important to follow all warnings and  
cautions in this section when leak testing  
equipment.  
When removing refrigerant from air  
conditioning or refrigerating equipment  
recover for reuse, recycling,  
reprocessing (reclaim), or properly  
destroy it.  
• Always determine possible refrigerant  
recycling or reclaiming requirements  
before beginning recovery. Questions  
about recovered refrigerants and  
acceptable refrigerant quality  
standards are addressed in ARI  
Standard 700.  
ƽCAUTION  
ƽWARNING  
Freezing Temperatures!  
Use of Pressure Regulator -  
Valves - Gauges!  
Do not allow liquid refrigerant to contact  
skin. If it does, treat the injury similar to  
frostbite. Slowly warm the affected area  
with lukewarm water and seek immedi-  
ate medical attention. Direct contact  
with liquid refrigerant may cause minor  
or moderate injury.  
Always use pressure regulators, valves,  
and gauges to control drum and line  
pressures when pressure testing  
equipment. Failure to follow these  
instructions could result in an explosion  
causing death, serious injury, or equip-  
ment damage.  
• Use approved containment vessels and  
safety standards when shipping  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
To charge the system, complete the  
following procedure:  
1. Charge liquid refrigerant into the liquid  
line service valve of each compressor  
circuit.The vacuum will draw some of  
the required refrigerant into the  
system. See Figure O-M-9.  
2. Complete the charging process by  
charging gaseous refrigerant into the  
suction line shrader valve with the unit  
running. However, make sure that  
some refrigerant is present in each  
circuit before starting the compressors.  
The refrigerant container should be  
upright so that gaseous refrigerant is  
drawn off the top.  
Note: SeeTables M-MP-6 and M-MP-7 for  
refrigerant charge requirements.  
NOTICE  
Compressor Damage!  
Do not allow liquid refrigerant to enter  
the suction line. Excessive liquid accumu-  
lation in the liquid lines may result in  
compressor damage.  
Figure M-MP-10.Typical water-cooled (SXWF) compressor section components  
100  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Coil Fin Cleaning  
Inlet GuideVanes  
Keep coils clean to maintain maximum  
performance. For operation at its highest  
efficiency, clean the refrigerant coil often  
during periods of high cooling demand or  
when dirty conditions prevail. Clean the  
coil a minimum of once per year to  
prevent dirt buildup in the coil fins, where  
it may not be visible.  
ƽWARNING  
Perform the following procedure every  
six months for proper inlet guide vane  
operation:  
1. Spray all parts of guide vane assembly  
with WD40.  
2. Spray all steel parts of guide vane  
assembly with ZRC.  
3. Spray hubs and moving parts with dry  
silicone lubricant (Mobil Mobilux 2, Shell  
alvonia 2, or equivalent).  
Hazardous Chemicals!  
Coil cleaning agents can be either acidic  
or highly alkaline. Handle chemical  
carefully. Proper handling should include  
goggles or face shield, chemical resistant  
gloves, boots, apron or suit as required.  
For personal safety refer to the cleaning  
agent manufacturer’s Materials Safety  
Data Sheet and follow all recommended  
safe handling practices. Failure to follow  
all safety instructions could result in  
death or serious injury.  
Remove large debris from the coils and  
straighten fins before cleaning. Remove  
filters before cleaning.  
On occasion, the inlet guide vane actuator  
or inlet guide vanes may need to be  
removed. For proper adjustment of inlet  
guide vanes and/or actuator.  
Clean refrigerant coils with cold water  
and detergent, or with one of the com-  
mercially available chemical coil clean-  
ers. Rinse coils thoroughly after cleaning.  
Note: Perform this procedure monthly if the  
unit is in a coastal area or corrosive  
environment.  
Economizer and evaporator coils are  
installed so the evaporator is directly  
behind the economizer.To clean between  
the coils, remove the sheet metal block  
off. Access the block off by removing the  
corner panels on the unit’s left or right  
rear side.  
If the refrigerant coil is installed back to  
back with the waterside economizer coil,  
use a cleaner that is acceptable for  
cleaning both types of coils.  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
NOTICE  
Proper Coil CleaningAgent!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
Do not clean the refrigerant coil with hot  
water or steam.The use of hot water or  
steam as a refrigerant coil-cleaner agent  
may cause high pressure inside the coil  
tubing and subsequent damage to the  
coil.  
Do not use acidic chemical coil cleaners.  
Also, do not use alkaline chemical coil  
cleaners with a pH value greater then  
8.5 (after mixing) without using an  
aluminum corrosion inhibitor in the  
cleaning solution. Use of the chemical  
may result in equipment damage.  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Inspecting and Cleaning Coils  
5. Mix a high quality coil cleaning  
detergent with water according to the  
manufacturers instructions. If the  
detergent is strongly alkaline after  
mixing (pH 8.5 or higher), it must  
contain an inhibitor. Carefully follow the  
cleaning solution manufacturers  
instructions regarding product use.  
6. Place the mixed solution in a garden  
pump-up sprayer or high pressure  
sprayer. If using a high pressure  
sprayer note the following:  
Cleaning the Condenser  
Coils become externally fouled as a result  
of normal operation. Coil surface dirt  
reduces heat transfer ability and can  
cause comfort problems, increased  
airflow resistance and thus increased  
operating energy costs.  
NOTICE  
ProperWaterTreatment!  
The use of untreated or improperly  
treated water in a CenTraVac may result  
in scaling, erosion, corrosion, algae or  
slime. It is recommended that the  
services of a qualified water treatment  
specialist be engaged to determine what  
water treatment, if any, is required.Trane  
assumes no responsibility for equipment  
failures which result from untreated or  
improperly treated water, or saline or  
brackish water.  
Inspect coils at least every six months or  
more frequently as dictated by operating  
experience. Cleaning frequently is  
dependent upon system operating hours,  
filter maintenance, efficiency, and dirt  
load. Following is the suggested method  
for cleaning steam and hot water coils.  
• Maintain a minimum nozzle spray  
angle of 15°  
• Spray perpendicular to the coil face  
• Protect other areas of the equipment  
and internal controls from contact with  
moisture or the cleaning solution  
• Keep the nozzle at least six inches from  
the coil  
Steam and Hot Water Coils  
1. Disconnect all electrical power to the  
unit.  
2.Wear the appropriate personal  
protective equipment (PPE).  
Condensing water contains minerals that  
collect on the condenser tube walls.  
Cooling towers also collect dust and  
foreign materials that deposit in the  
condenser tube.The formation of scale or  
sludge in the condenser is indicated by a  
decreased water flow, low temperature  
difference between inlet and outlet water,  
and abnormally high condensing tem-  
peratures.To maintain maximum  
condenser efficiency, the condenser must  
remain free of built-up scale and sludge.  
Clean the condenser either mechanically  
or chemically.  
3. Access both sides of the coil section.  
4. Use a soft brush to remove loose  
debris from both sides of the coil.  
5. Use a steam cleaning machine, starting  
from the top of the coil and working  
downward. Clean the leaving air side of  
the coil first, then the entering air side.  
Use a block-off to prevent steam from  
blowing through the coil and into a dry  
section of the unit.  
6. Repeat step 5 as necessary. Confirm  
that the drain line is open following  
completion of the cleaning process.  
7. Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before  
putting the system back into service.  
8. Straighten any coil fins that may be  
damaged with a fin rake.  
9. Replace all panels and parts and  
restore electrical power to the unit.  
10. Ensure that contaminated material  
does not contact other areas of the  
equipment or building. Properly dispose  
of all contaminated materials and  
cleaning solutions.  
• Do not exceed 600 psig  
Draining theWaterside Economizer Coil  
NOTICE  
Coil Freezeup!  
Properly drain and vent coils when not in  
use.Trane recommends glycol protection  
in all possible freezing applications. Use a  
glycol approved for use with commercial  
cooling and heating systems and copper  
tube coils. Failure to do so may result in  
equipment damage.  
Mechanical Cleaning of Condenser and  
Economizer Coils  
1.Turn off the condenser supply water.  
Remove drain plugs discussed in the  
“Draining the Coil” section on page 91.  
2. Remove the condenser head to expose  
the condenser tubes.  
3. Rotate a round brush through the tubes  
to loosen contaminant.  
4. Flush tubes with water to push the  
sludge out through the drain opening in  
the bottom of the supply header and  
the return pipe.  
5.To clean the economizer tubes, remove  
the cast iron header plates at both sides  
of the coil between the inlet and outlet  
headers (four-row coils only; two-row  
coils do not have cover plates at right  
end). Rotate round brush through tubes  
from left end to loosen contaminants.  
Flush tubes with water.  
Drain plugs are in the piping below each  
coils supply and return header. Use these  
plugs to drain the coil and piping.When  
draining the coil, open the vents at the top  
of the supply and return headers. Also, a  
drain plug is at the bottom of the inlet  
condenser manifold and in the outlet pipe  
near the units left side. Remove these  
plugs to drain the condensers. Be sure to  
open the vent plugs at the top of the  
condenser inlet and outlet manifold. See  
Figure O-M-9.  
Refrigerant Coils  
1. Disconnect all electrical power to the  
unit.  
2.Wear the appropriate personal  
protective equipment (PPE).  
3. Access to the coil section of the unit  
(both sides).  
4. Use a soft brush to remove loose  
debris from both sides of the coil.  
When refilling the condenser/waterside  
economizer coil system with water,  
provide adequate water treatment to  
prevent the formation of scale or corro-  
sion.  
102  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
6. Replace condenser end plates and  
clamps.The end plates must be  
centered when tightening the clamp.  
7. Replace coil headers with gaskets and  
torque bolts to 50 ft.-lb.  
1. Remove actuator motor from support  
plate.  
2. Remove shaft coupling.  
3.Torque the packing nut to 10-ft.-lbs. of  
torque.  
4. Replace shaft coupling.  
5. Replace actuator motor.  
direction or the arrow. Push the paddle  
assembly in until it hits the barrel cavity  
bottom.  
7. Place the spring clip into the switch  
barrel and push it down with a small,  
flat blade screwdriver until the spring  
clip engages the groove in the switch  
barrel.  
8. Replace drain and vent plugs.  
Chemical Cleaning of Condenser and  
Economizer Coil  
Flow Switch Maintenance  
8.When replacing the paddle assembly,  
check the operation by pushing on the  
paddles flat side.The paddle should  
swing freely in the direction of the  
arrow.This action confirms that the  
paddle assembly is properly installed.  
9. Replace the switch into the unit piping  
using a good pipe thread sealer.Tighten  
the switch so that its final position has  
the arrow parallel to the water pipe and  
pointing toward the left end of the unit  
(arrow is pointing in the direction of the  
water flow).  
Chemical cleaning removes scale  
deposits built up by minerals in the water.  
For a suitable chemical solution, consult a  
water treatment specialist. The  
condenser water circuit is composed of  
copper, steel, and cast iron.  
Flow switches have a magnet on the  
vane assembly that attracts ferrous  
particulate may build up on the magnet to  
the point that the vane will wedge and not  
operate properly.  
When the flow switch does not operate,  
remove and replace it or disassemble  
and clean it.  
The chemical supply house should  
approve or provide all materials used in  
the external circulating system, along  
with the quantity of cleaning material,  
duration of cleaning time, and safety  
precautions necessary for handling the  
cleaning agent.  
Cleaning the Flow Switch  
If ferrous particulate contaminates tower  
water, the ferrous particles may cling to  
the magnet on the switch paddle  
assembly. Build up of the ferrous particles  
may cause the paddle to stick and not  
function properly.  
Piping Components  
To avoid this problem, remove the switch  
and clean each time you clean the  
condensers, or clean as needed to keep  
the switch operational.  
WaterValves  
Water valves have a stern packing nut. If  
there is evidence of water leakage at the  
valve stem, proceed as follows:  
To clean the paddle assembly, remove it  
following the procedure below:  
1. Remove the switch from the unit.  
2. The paddle assembly and wire retainer  
clip holds the paddle assembly in the  
switch body.  
3. Remove the wire retainer clip by  
reaching down past the paddle with a  
pair of slim nosed pliers and gripping  
the end of the wire. Pull up on the wire,  
clip, and remove it.  
4. After removing the wire clip, use the  
pliers to pull the paddle assembly out of  
the switch barrel. Clamp the pliers onto  
the end of the paddle and remove the  
paddle assembly. It will slide straight  
out.  
5. Clean the ferrous particulate from the  
magnet using a rag or tack cloth.The  
particulate is attracted to the magnet,  
so it is necessary to pull it off. It will not  
easily wipe off.  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
6. After cleaning the magnet, replace the  
paddle assembly into the switch bodys  
barrel. However, it is important to  
position the paddle perpendicular to the  
arrow on the switch’s side and place the  
paddle’s flat side facing the opposite  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maintenance  
procedures  
Maintenance  
Maintenance Periodic  
Checklists  
Remove algae and or any airflow  
obstructions.  
4. Check the condition and tension of fan  
belts. Adjust tension if belts are floppy  
or squeal continually. Replace worn or  
fraying belts in matched sets.  
4. Check the fan assembly sheave  
alignment.Tighten set screws to their  
proper torques.  
5. Check water valves for leakage at  
valve stem packing nut.  
6. Inspect the inlet vane assembly and  
perform maintenance procedures in  
the IGV maintenance section.  
Monthly Checklist  
The following check list provides the  
recommended maintenance schedule to  
keep the commercial self-contained  
equipment running efficiently.  
Note: Check belt tension and adjust it at  
least twice daily the first days of new belt  
operation. Belt tension will rapidly decrease  
until the belts are run in.  
Note: Perform this procedure monthly if the  
unit is in a coastal or corrosive environ-  
ment.  
ƽWARNING  
Hazardous Voltage w/Capaci-  
tors!  
5. Check the liquid line sight glasses  
during operation. Bubbles in the sight  
glasses indicate a possible shortage of  
refrigerant or an obstruction in the  
liquid lines, e.g. dirty liquid line filter  
driers.  
6. Inspect filter driers for leaks, flow  
obstructions, or temperature drop  
across the filter drier. A noticeable  
temperature differential, e.g. 5°F, in the  
liquid line may indicate an obstruction.  
Replace the filter drier if it appears  
clogged.  
Annual Maintenance  
Check and tighten all set screws, bolts,  
locking collars and sheaves.  
1. Inspect, clean, and tighten all electrical  
connections.  
2. Visually inspect the entire unit casing  
for chips or corrosion. Remove rust or  
corrosion and repaint surfaces.  
3. Visually check for leaks in refrigerant  
piping.  
4. Inspect fan, motor, and control contacts.  
Replace badly worn or eroded contacts.  
5. Inspect the thermal expansion valve  
sensing bulbs for cleanliness, good  
contact with the suction line, and  
adequate insulation from ambient air.  
6.Verify the superheat setting is 12 -17°F  
at the compressor.  
Disconnect all electric power, including  
remote disconnects before servicing.  
Follow proper lockout/tagout proce-  
dures to ensure the power cannot be  
inadvertently energized. For variable  
frequency drives or other energy storing  
components provided byTrane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s  
literature for allowable waiting periods  
for discharge of capacitors.Verify with an  
appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect  
power and discharge capacitors before  
servicing could result in death or serious  
injury.  
7. Inspect the optional waterside  
economizer coil. Clean the coil to  
prevent airflow restrictions through the  
fins.  
8. Check and record operating pressures.  
Semi-Annual Maintenance  
1.Verify the fan motor is properly  
lubricated. Follow lubrication  
Note: For additional information regard-  
ing the safe discharge of capacitors, see  
PROD-SVB06A-EN or PROD-SVB06A-FR.  
When checking operating pressures and  
conditions, establish the following  
nominal conditions for consistent mea-  
surements.  
1. Leaving air temperature greater than  
60°F  
2. Entering air temperature is 80 - 90°F  
3. Entering water temperature greater  
than 65°F  
4. Inlet guide vanes at least halfway open  
5. Compressors running at full load  
6. Drain the condensing water system  
and inspect it thoroughly for fouling,  
clean condensers if necessary.  
recommendations on the motor tag or  
nameplate. Contact the motor  
manufacturer for more information.  
2. Lubricate fan bearings. For best results,  
lubricate bearings during unit operation.  
Refer to the “Fan Bearings” section on  
page 84.  
3.With power disconnected, manually  
rotate the fan wheel to check for  
obstructions in the housing or  
interference with fan blades or inlet  
guide vane option. Remove  
1. Inspect unit air filters. Clean or replace  
if airflow is blocked or if filters are dirty.  
2. Inspect coils for excess moisture or  
icing. Icing on the coils may indicate low  
airflow supply, restricted airflow from  
dirty fins, evaporator frost protection  
sensor problems, or a shortage of  
refrigerant flowing through the coil.  
3. Check that condensate from the  
evaporator and economizer coils flows  
freely through the condensate piping,  
traps, drain pan, and drainage holes.  
obstructions and debris. Center the fan  
wheel if necessary.  
104  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
troubleshooting  
System Checks  
4. Inspect air filters and coils to bel sure  
that airflow to the unit is not restricted.  
5. Check the zone thermostat settings.  
6. Ensure that the fan is rotating in the  
proper direction. If phasing is wrong at  
the main power terminal block, the fan  
and compressors will not run correctly.  
7. Inspect ductwork and duct connections  
for tightness.  
It is important that pressures be mea-  
sured under stable and constant condi-  
tions in order for the readings to be  
useful.  
ƽWARNING  
Voltage Imbalance  
Live Electrical Components!  
Voltage imbalance on three-phase  
systems can cause motor overheating  
and premature failure. Maximum  
allowable imbalance is 2.0%, and the  
readings used to determine it must be  
measured at the compressor terminals.  
During installation, testing, servicing and  
troubleshooting of this product, it may be  
necessary to work with live electrical  
components. Have a qualified licensed  
electrician or other individual who has  
been properly trained in handling live  
electrical components perform these  
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical  
safety precautions when exposed to live  
electrical components could result in  
death or serious injury.  
Operating Procedures  
Install pressure gauges on the discharge  
and suction line access valves.When the  
unit has stabilized (after operating  
approximately 15 minutes at full load),  
record suction and discharge pressures.  
System malfunctions such as low airflow,  
line restrictions, incorrect refrigerant  
charge, malfunctioning of expansion  
valves, damaged compressors, etc. will  
result in pressure variations which are  
outside the normal range.  
Voltage imbalance is defined as 100  
times the sum of the division of the three  
voltages from the average voltage. If, for  
example, the three measured voltages  
are 221, 230, 227, the average is:  
(221+230+227) = 226 volts  
3
Before proceeding with technical trouble  
charts or controls checkout, complete the  
following system analysis:  
1. Measure actual supply voltage at the  
compressor and an motor terminals  
with the unit running.Voltage must be  
within the range listed on the motor  
nameplate. Phase imbalance must be  
less than 2.0%.  
2. Check all wiring and connections to be  
sure that they are intact, secure and  
properly routed.The as wired system  
diagrams are provided in the unit  
control panel.  
3. Check that all fuses are installed and  
properly sized.  
Therefore, the percentage of voltage  
imbalance is:  
100*(226-221) = 2.2%  
Note: If phasing at the main incoming  
power terminal is incorrect, switch two of  
the three incoming power leads. If a  
compressor has been replaced and the  
phase is changed at the compressor, it will  
run backwards and discharge pressure will  
be very low. To resolve incorrect compres-  
sor wire phasing, change phasing at the  
compressor.  
226  
In this example, 2.2% imbalance of more  
than 2.0% exists, be sure to check the  
voltage at the unit disconnect and  
terminal block switch. If an imbalance at  
the unit disconnect switch does not  
exceed 2.0%, the imbalance is caused by  
faulty wiring within the unit. Be sure to  
conduct a thorough inspection of the unit  
electrical wiring connections to locate the  
fault, and make any repairs necessary.  
Common Unit Problems and Solutions  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
Drain pan is overflowing  
Plugged drain line  
Unit not level  
Clean drain line  
Level unit  
Standing water in drain pan  
Wet interior insulation  
Unit not level  
Level Unit  
Plugged drain line  
Clean drain line  
Coil face velocity too high  
Improper trap design  
Drain pan leaks/overflowing  
Condensation on surfaces  
Reduce fan speed  
Design trap per unit installation instructions  
Repair Leaks  
Insulate surfaces  
Excess dirt in unit  
Missing filters  
Filter bypass  
Replace filters  
Reduce filter bypass  
Microbial growth (mold)  
Standing water in drain pan  
Moisture problems  
See “Standing water in drain pan” above  
See “Wet interior insulation” above  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
diagnostics  
Diagnostics  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the CO2 sensor transducer  
input receives a signal that is within range  
for ten continuous seconds.  
CondenserTemp Sensor Failure - Circuit 1,  
2, 3, or 4  
Problem: The saturated condenser  
temperature input is out of range for circuit  
#1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Refer to the IntelliPak Self-Contained  
Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01B-EN,  
for specific unit programming and  
troubleshooting information. In particular,  
reference the “Service Mode Menu” and  
“Diagnostic Menu”sections in the  
programming guide. Refer to the  
following text for general diagnostic and  
troubleshooting procedures. Common  
diagnostics and troubleshooting  
Compressor Contactor Fail - Circuit 1, 2,  
3, or 4  
Problem: The compressor contactor for  
Ckt. 1, 2, 3, or 4 has malfunctioned.  
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7  
ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring  
between sensor and MCM/SCM.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The circuit  
compressor proving input is detected  
closed continuously for more than three  
seconds while neither compressor output  
on that circuit closes.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading a  
signal that is out of range for the circuit #1,  
2, 3, or 4 saturated condenser temperature  
sensor. (temp < -55°F or temp > 209°F).  
procedures follow below.  
A
Auto Reset S/A Static Pressure Limit  
Problem: The supply air static pressure  
went too high.  
UCM Reaction: A “Lockout Ckt # 1, 2, 3, or  
4” request is issued to the compressor  
staging control function.  
UCM Reaction: A "lockout ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4  
request is issued to the compressor  
staging control function.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The S/A static  
pressure exceeded the S/A static  
pressure limit setpoint for at least one  
second continuously.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4  
condenser temp input returns to its  
allowable range within 10 seconds.  
Reset Required: (PMR) A manual reset is  
required after the disgnostic is set. It can  
be reset by the HI orTracer Summit.  
UCM Reaction: A "supply air pressure  
shutdown" signal is sent to the following  
functions:  
CompressorTrip - Ckt 1, 2, 3, or 4  
Problem: The compressor ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4  
has tripped.  
D
Dirty Filter  
Problem:There is a dirty filter.  
a. Compressor staging control,  
b. Economizer actuator control,  
c. Heat operation,  
Reason for Diagnostic: The ckt #1, 2, 3, or  
4 compressor proving input is detected  
open continuously for more than 3  
seconds when either or both compressor  
outputs on that circuit energize (as  
described in the compressor protection  
function).  
Reason for Diagnostic: The filter switch  
input on the RTM is closed for more than  
60 seconds continuously.  
d. Supply fan control,  
e. IGV/VFD control,  
f. Exhaust fan control,  
g. Exhaust actuator control  
UCM Reaction: An information only  
diagnostic is set.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the IGV close. The supply fan  
is not allowed to restart for 15 seconds  
after the diagnostic occurs. An auto reset  
will also occur if the unit cycles out of  
occupied mode and back.  
Reset Required: (INFO) An automatic reset  
occurs after the dirty filter input reopens  
for 60 continuous seconds.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The circuit  
compressor proving input is detected  
open continuously for more than 3  
seconds when either or both compressor  
outputs on that circuit energize (as  
described in the compressor protection  
function).  
E
C
ECEM Communications Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost communication  
with the ECEM.  
CO2 Sensor Failure  
Problem: The VCM CO2 sensor input  
signal is out of range.  
UCM’ Reaction: A “lockout ckt #1, 2, 3, or  
4” request is issued to the compressor  
staging control function.  
Check: Field/unit wiring between RTM and  
ECEM module.  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
sensor and VCM.  
Reset Required: (PMR) A manual reset is  
required after this diagnostic occurs. The  
diagnostic can be reset by the unit  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the ECEM.  
UCM Reaction: If the unit has the  
comparative enthalpy option, the  
economizer enable r.e. enthalpy function  
will revert to level 2 enthalpy comparison.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the CO2  
sensor transducer input.  
mounted HI module orTracer Summit.  
UCM Reaction: The CO2 reset function  
disables.  
106  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
diagnostics  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication has been  
restored.  
configured with water cooled  
chilled water cooling function will be  
cancelled.  
b. If any of the GBAS setpoint control  
parameters are the HI-selected setpoint  
sources, then those setpoints will revert  
to the default HI setpoints.  
c. Any active GBAS output control  
parameters will be ignored.  
d. A failsafe function in the GBAS module  
will cause all GBAS outputs to be  
zeroed and deenergized.  
condenser and/or economizer  
c.Time to React: 10 sec <T < 20 sec  
d. DiagnosticText (Human Interface  
Display) “ENTERINGWATERTEMP  
SENSOR FAIL”  
e. Actions to be Initiated: A “Disable  
Water Side Economizer” request is  
issued to “Water Side Economizer  
Temperature Enable Function”  
f. Reset: An automatic reset occurs after  
the EnteringWaterTemp. input returns to  
within range continuously for 10 seconds.  
Emergency Stop  
Problem: The emergency top input is  
open.  
Reason for Diagnostic: An open circuit  
has occurred on the emergency stop  
input caused either by a high duct temp t-  
stat trip, or the opening of field-provided  
contacts, switch, etc.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication has been  
restored.  
UCM Reaction: Off or close requests are  
issued as appropriate to the following  
functions;  
a. Compressor staging/chilled water  
cooling control  
b. Heat operation  
c. Supply fan control and proof of  
operation  
d. Exhaust fan control and proof of  
operation.  
e. Exhaust actuator control  
f. Outside air damper control  
g. OnVAV units, IGV/VFD control  
EvapTemp Sensor Failure - Circuit 1, 2, 3,  
or 4  
Problem: The evaporator temperature  
sensor (ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4) is out of range.  
H
Heat Failure  
Problem: The heat has failed.  
(Electric heat unit)Typically, this is  
because the electric heat section became  
too hot.  
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 830 ohms (200°F) and  
345.7Kohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit  
wiring between sensor and MCM/SCM.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The heat fail input  
on the heat module was closed:  
a. for more than 80 seconds,  
b. for ten consecutive occurrances (each  
lasting five seconds or more) within a  
210 second period.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the circuit  
#1 evaporator temperature sensor input  
(temp < -55°F or temp > 209°F).  
Reset Required: (PMR) A manual reset is  
required after the emergency stop input  
recloses. The diagnostic can be reset by  
the HI.  
UCM Reaction: The coil frost protection  
function for the refrigeration circuit (#1, 2,  
3, or 4) only is disabled.  
UCM Reaction: An information only  
diagnostic is set.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the #1, 2, 3, or 4 evap temp  
input returns to its allowable range for 10  
seconds.  
Entering Cond WaterTemp Sensor Fail  
Problem:  
Reset Required: (INFO) An automatic  
reset occurs after the heat fail input  
remains open for 210 seconds  
continuously.  
Activation Conditions: temperature < -  
50°F or temperature > 209°F, and unit  
configured for water cooled  
G
condenser  
Heat Module Auxilliary Temperature  
Sensor Fail  
Problem: The heat mod aux temp sensor  
input is out of range.  
c.Time to React: 10 sec <T < 20 sec  
d. DiagnosticText (Human Interface  
Display) “ENT CONDWATERTEMP  
SENSOR FAIL”  
GBAS 0-5 VDC Module Comm Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost  
communication with the GBAS module.  
e. Actions to be Initiated: A “Lockout All  
Ckts ” request is issued to the  
“Compressor Staging Function”  
f. Reset: An automatic reset occurs after  
the entering condenser water  
temperature input returns to within range  
continuously for 15 seconds.  
Check: Field/unit wiring between RTM  
and GBAS.  
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7  
ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring  
between sensor and heat module.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the GBAS module.  
Reason for Diagnostic: At least one  
enabled unit function has the heat  
module auxillary temperature input  
designated as its sensor, and the unit is  
reading a signal that is out of range for  
this input (temp < -55°F or temp > 209°F).  
UCM Reaction: The UCM will initiate the  
following actions;  
a. If the demand limit input was closed  
prior to the communications loss, then  
the demand limit commands issued to  
the heat operation function (if  
Entering Water Temp Sensor Fail  
a. Data used (module, packet, byte, bit):  
WSM, 01,18,05  
b. Activation Conditions: temperature < -  
50°F or temperature > 209°F, and unit  
applicable) and the compressor staging/  
UCM Reaction: The functions that  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
diagnostics  
designated the heat module auxillary  
temperature input as their input are  
disabled.  
for > 1 second. On units with both  
hydronic heat and chilled water, both low  
air temp limit inputs are active, and the  
unit will respond in the same manner  
regardless of which input is used.  
supply air static pressure limit diagnostic  
has occurred for the third time while the  
unit is operating in occupied mode.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the heat module auxillary  
temperature input returns to its allowable  
range for 10 seconds.  
UCM Reaction: A "supply air pressure  
shutdown" signal is sent to the following  
functions;  
UCM Reaction: The UCM will initiate the  
following actions;  
a. Compressor staging control,  
b. Economizer actuator control,  
c. Heat operation,  
a. An “open all water valves”request is  
issued to the heat module function,  
causing any steam, hot water, or chilled  
water valves on the unit to open.  
b. An “all heat off” request is issued to  
the heat control function.  
c. A “fan off” request is sent to the supply  
fan control function.  
d. A “close damper” request is sent to  
the economizer actuator control  
function.  
Heat Module Comm Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost  
communication with the heat module.  
d. Supply fan control,  
e. IGV/VFD control,  
f. Exhaust fan control  
g. Exhaust actuator control  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
RTM and heat module.  
Reset Required: (PMR) A manual reset is  
required and can be accomplished at the  
HI,Tracer Summit, or by cycling power to  
the RTM.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the heat module.  
UCM Reaction: An “all heat off” request  
is sent to the heat operation function.  
Reset Required: (PMR) A manual reset is  
required after the low air temp limit trip  
condition clears. The diagnostic can be  
reset at the unit mounted human  
interface, byTracer Summit, or by cycling  
power to the RTM.  
MCM Communications Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost communication  
with the MCM.  
If the unit has staged gas or electric heat,  
all heat module outputs will be zeroed  
and deenergized.  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
RTM and MCM.  
If the unit has hydronic heat or chilled  
water installed, the unit will turn off the  
supply fan and close the outside air  
damper upon the occurrance of a heat  
module comm failure. A failsafe function  
in the heat module will cause all water  
valves to be set to 100% to provide full  
water flow. Unless used for switching  
purposes (air handlers with chilled water  
and mod gas, or chilled water and  
hydronic heat) all binary outputs will be  
deenergized.  
Low Pressure Control Open - Circuit 1, 2,  
3, or 4  
Problem: The Low Pressure Control (LPC)  
for Ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4 is open.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communications with the MCM.  
UCM Reaction: A “Lockout” request is  
sent to the compressor staging control  
function. And a failsafe function in the  
MCM will cause all MCM outputs to be  
zeroed and deenergized.  
Check: State of refrigerant charge for ckt  
#1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The Ckt # 1 LPC  
input is detected open as described in the  
compressor protection function.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication has been  
restored.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication has been  
restored.  
UCM Reaction: A “Lockout Ckt # 1, 2, 3, or  
4” request is issued to the compressor  
staging control function.  
Mode Input Failure  
Problem: The RTM mode input is out of  
range.  
Reset Required: (PMR) A manual reset is  
required anytime after the diagnostic is  
set. The diagnostic can be reset by the  
human interface,Tracer Summit, or by  
cycling power to the RTM.  
L
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 1 ohm and 40 ohms. If so, check  
field/unit wiring between sensor and RTM.  
Low Air Temp Limit Trip  
Problem: The low air temp limit has  
tripped. (Units with steam or hot water  
heating, or air handlers with chilled water  
cooling)  
Reason for Diagnostic: The mode input  
signal on the RTM is out of range  
(resistance < 1 ohm or resistance > 40  
ohms).  
M
Reason for Diagnostic: A low air temp  
limit trip is detected continuously for  
more than one second. This can occur if  
the hydronic heat low air temp limit input  
closes for > 1 second, or if the chilled  
water low air temp limit trip input opens  
Manual Reset SA Static Press Limit  
Problem: The supply air static pressure  
went too high for the third consecutive  
time.  
UCM Reaction: The system mode reverts  
to the default (HI set) system mode.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The auto reset  
Reset Required: (INFO) An automatic reset  
108  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
diagnostics  
occurs after the mode input returns to its  
allowable range for 10 seconds.  
temperature changeover (“Level 1”)  
control.  
range for 10 continuous seconds, or after  
a different occupied zone heating setpoint  
selection source is user-defined.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the OA humidity input  
returns to its allowable range for 10  
seconds.  
N
R
NSB Panel ZoneTemperature Sensor  
Failure  
Problem: The NSB panel's zone temp  
sensor input is out of range. (This input is  
at the NSB panel, not on the unit itself).  
Return Air Humidity Sensor Failure  
Problem: On units with both airside  
economizer and comparative enthalpy  
installed, the return air humidity sensor  
input is out of range.  
O/ATemp. Sensor Failure  
Problem: The outside air temperature  
sensor input is out of range.  
Check: If have an external sensor  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
the sensor and ECEM.  
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7  
ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring  
between sensor and RTM.  
connected to the NSB panel zone sensor  
input, then the internal NSB panel zone  
sensor should be disabled.Verify sensor  
resistance. If in valid range, check wiring  
between the sensor and NSB panel.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the return  
air humidity sensor (humidity < 5% or  
humidity > 100%).  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the outside  
air temperature input on the RTM (temp.  
< -55°F or temp > 209°F).  
NSB Panel Comm Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost  
communications with the night setback  
panel (programmable zone sensor).  
UCM Reaction: The economizer enable  
r.e. enthalpy function reverts to reference  
enthalpy changeover (“Level 2”) control.  
UCM Reaction: These unit functions  
occur:  
• low ambient compressor lockout  
disables  
• O/A damper drives to minimum position  
• onVAV units with S/A temp. reset type  
selected as O/A temp. reset, the reset  
type reverts to “none” for the duration  
of the failure  
Check: Field/unit wiring between RTM  
and NSB Panel.  
Reset Required: (PMR) An automatic  
reset occurs after the RA humidity input  
returns to its allowable range  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the NSB panel.  
continuously for 10 seconds.  
UCM Reaction: The unit reverts to the  
next lower priority mode switching  
source (typically the HI default mode). If  
the NSB panel zone sensor is the  
designated sensor source for any  
functions, those functions are disabled.  
Return AirTemp Sensor Failure  
Problem: On units with the comparative  
enthalpy option, the return air  
Reset Required: (PAR) an automatic reset  
occurs after the O/A temperature input  
returns to its allowable range.To prevent  
rapid cycling of the diagnostic, there is a  
10 second delay before the automatic  
reset.  
temperature sensor input is out of range.  
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7  
ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring  
between the sensor and ECEM.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication has been  
restored.  
Occupied Zone Heat Setpoint Failure  
Problem: The occupied zone heat setpoint  
input is out of range.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the return  
air humidity sensor (temp < -55°F or  
temp > 209°F).  
O
O/A Humidity Sensor Failure  
Problem: The outside air humidity sensor  
data is out of range.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The input  
designated as occupied zone heating  
setpoint source is out of range for the  
outside air temperature input on the RTM  
(temp. < 45°F or temp > 94°F).  
UCM Reaction: The economizer enable  
r.e. enthalpy function reverts to reference  
enthalpy changeover (“Level 2”) control.  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
the sensor and RTM.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the RA temp input returns to  
its allowable range continuously for 10  
seconds.  
UCM Reaction: The active occupied zone  
heating setpoint reverts to the default  
value.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the outside  
air humidity sensor (humidity < 5% or  
humidity > 100%).  
Reset Required: (PAR) an automatic reset  
occurs after the occupied zone heating  
setpoint input returns to its allowable  
UCM Reaction: The economizer enable  
enthalpy function reverts to dry-bulb  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
diagnostics  
RTM Aux.Temp. Sensor Failure  
Problem: The RTM auxillary temperature  
sensor data is out of range.  
ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring  
between sensor and RTM.  
UCM Reaction:The default space  
pressure setpoint will become the active  
space pressure setpoint.  
Reason for Diagnostic: At least one  
enabled unit function has the RTM zone  
temperature input designated as its  
sensor, and the unit is reading a signal  
that is out of range for this input (temp. < -  
55°F or temp > 150°F).  
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 830 ohms (200°F)and 345.7  
ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring  
between sensor and RTM.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the designated space  
pressure setpoint source sends a signal  
within range for 10 continuous seconds,  
or after a different space pressure  
setpoint source is user-defined.  
Reason for Diagnostic: At least one  
enabled unit function has the RTM  
auxillary temperature input designated  
as its sensor, and the unit is reading a  
signal that is out of range for this input  
(temp. < -55°F or temp > 209°F).  
UCM Reaction: The functions with the  
RTM zone temperataure input deignated  
as their sensor are disabled.  
Supply Air Pressure Sensor Failure  
Problem: The supply air pressure sensor  
voltage input is out of range.  
Reset Required: (PAR) an automatic reset  
occurs after the designated zone  
temperature signal returns to its  
allowable range.To prevent rapid cycling  
of the diagnostic, there is a 10 second  
delay before the automatic reset.  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
the sensor and RTM.  
UCM Reaction: The functions with the  
RTM auxillliary temperataure input  
deignated as their sensor are disabled.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the supply  
air pressure sensor voltage input (input <  
40mV or input > 4.75V)  
Reset Required: (PAR) an automatic reset  
occurs after the designated zone  
temperature signal returns to its  
S
allowable range.To prevent rapid cycling  
of the diagnostic, there is a 10 second  
delay before the automatic reset.  
SCM Communication Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost  
communication with the SCM.  
UCM Reaction: The IGVs will drive closed,  
and the following functions are disabled;  
a. SA pressure control  
b. SA static pressure limit  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
the RTM and SCM.  
RTM Data Storage Error  
Problem: There was a data transmission  
error.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the SA temp heating setpoint  
input returns to within range for 10  
continuous seconds, or after a different  
SA temp heating setopint selection  
source is user-defined.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the SCM.  
Check: This can be caused by an  
intermittant power loss.Turn the unit off  
for 1-2 minutes, then back on again. If  
diagnostic persists, then the RTM may  
need to be replaced.  
UCM Reaction: A “lockout” request is  
sent to the compressor staging control  
function. A failsafe function in the SCM  
will cause all SCM outputs to be zeroed  
and deenergized.  
Supply Air Pressure Setpoint Failure  
Problem: The SA pressure input signal is  
out of range.  
Reason for Diagnostic: An error occurred  
while the RTM was writing data to its  
internal non-volitile memory (EEPROM).  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication has been  
restored.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The SA pressure  
setpoint input is sending a signal that is  
out of range (Input < 1.0 iwc or input > 4.3  
iwc)  
UCM Reaction: An information only  
diagnostic will be displayed at the human  
interface.  
Space Static Press Setpt Failure  
Problem: The active space static pressure  
setpoint is out of range.  
UCM Reaction: The default SA pressure  
setpoint will become the active SA  
pressure setpoint.  
Reset Required: (INFO) A manual reset  
may be made at the human interface, at  
Tracer Summit, or by cycling power to  
the RTM.  
Check: Check setpoint value. Also, if  
space pressure setpoint source is GBAS,  
but this setpoint has not been assigned to  
any of the four analog inputs on GBAS,  
this message will occur.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the designated SA pressure  
setpoint source sends a signal within  
range for 10 continuous seconds, or after  
a different SA pressure setpoint source is  
user-defined.  
RTM Zone Sensor Failure  
Problem: The RTM zone temperature  
sensor input is out of range.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the space  
static pressure setpoint (input < 0.03 iwc  
or input > 0.20 iwc).  
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7  
110  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
diagnostics  
SupplyAirTemp Cool Setpoint Fail  
Problem: The active supply air  
temperature cooling setpoint is out of  
range.  
UCM Reaction:These unit functions are  
disabled:  
Supply Fan VFD Bypass Enabled  
a. Data used (module,packet,byte,bit): RTM  
b. Activation conditions: supply fan VFD  
bypass has been activated and supply fan  
vfd bypass is installed.  
c.Time to React: 10 sec <T < 20 sec  
d. Diagnostic text (human interface display)  
SUPPLY FAN VFD BYPASS ENABLED”  
e. Actions to be Initiated: NONE  
• supply air tempering  
• economizing  
• supply air temperature low limit function  
(CV units)  
• supply air temperature control heating  
and cooling functions (VAV units)  
Reason for Diagnostic: The input  
designated as the SA temp cooling  
setpoint is out is out of range (temp <  
35°F or temp > 95°F).  
Reset Required: (PAR) an automatic reset  
occurs after the designated S/A  
temperature input returns to its allowable  
range.To prevent rapid cycling of the  
diagnostic, there is a 10 second delay  
before the automatic reset.  
f. Reset: The INFO diagnostic is cleared  
when the supply fan VFD bypass is  
deactivated.  
UCM Reaction: The default HI-set SA  
temp cooling setpoint becomes the active  
SA temp cooling setpoint.  
T
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the SA temp cooling setpoint  
input returns to within range for 10  
continuous seconds, or after a different  
SA temp cooling setopint selection  
source is user-defined.  
LCI-I Module Comm Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost communication  
with the LCI-I.  
Supply Fan Failure  
Problem: There is no supply airflow  
indication after the supply fan is requested  
on.  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
RTM and LCI-I module.  
Supply AirTemp Heat Setpoint Fail  
Problem: The active supply air  
temperature cooling setpoint is out of  
range.  
Check: Check belts, linkages, etc. on the  
supply fan assembly. If these are ok, check  
field/unit wiring between RTM and supply  
fan. If the supply fan runs in service mode,  
then verify airflow proving switch and  
wiring.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the LCI-I module.  
UCM Reaction: All active commands and  
setpoints provided byTracer Summit  
through the LCI-I will be cancelled and/or  
ignored. And whereTracer Summit has  
been designated as setpoint source, local  
HI default setpoints will be used.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The input  
designated as the SA temp heating  
setpoint is out is out of range (temp <  
35°F or temp > 185°F).  
Reason for Diagnostic: The supply airflow  
input is detected OPEN for 40 continuous  
seconds during any period of time in which  
the supply fan binary output is ON.  
between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7  
ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring  
between the sensor and MCM.  
UCM Reaction: The default HI-set SA  
temp heating setpoint becomes the  
active SA temp heating setpoint.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication has been  
restored.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the SA temp heating setpoint  
input returns to within range for 10  
continuous seconds, or after a different  
SA temp heating setopint selection  
source is user-defined.  
This input is ignored for up to 5 minutes  
after the supply fan starts, until airflow is  
first detected.  
Tracer Communications Failure  
Problem:The LCI-I has lost communication  
withTracer Summit.  
UCM Reaction: “Off” or “Close” requests  
are issued as appropriate to the following  
functions;  
a. Compressor staging/chilled water  
control  
b. Heat operation  
c. Supply fan control & proof of operation  
d. Exhaust fan control & proof of operation  
e. Exhaust actuator control  
f. Economizer actuator control  
g. IGV / VFD control  
Check:Tracer Summit(building control  
panel) is powered up and running properly.  
If so, check unit wiring between LCI-I and  
Tracer Summit (building control panel).  
Supply Air Temperature Failure  
Problem: The supply air temperature  
sensor input is out of range.  
Reason for Diagnostic:The LCI-I has lost  
communications withTracer Summit for >  
15 minutes.  
Check: Sensor resistance should be  
between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7  
ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring  
between sensor and RTM.  
UCM Reaction: All active commands and  
setpoints provided byTracer Summit  
through the LCI-I will be cancelled and/or  
ignored. And whereTracer Summit has  
been designated as the setpoint source,  
local HI default setpoints are used.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading  
a signal that is out of range for the supply  
air temperature input on the RTM (temp.  
< -55°F or temp > 209°F).  
Reset Required: (PMR) A manual reset is  
required anytime after the diagnostic is  
set. The diagnostic can be reset at the HI,  
Tracer Summit, or by cycling power to the  
RTM.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
diagnostics  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication between  
Tracer Summit and the LCI-I is restored.  
different, valid unoccupied zone cool  
setpoint selection source.  
Check: Check field/unit wiring between  
sensor and VCM.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The unit is reading a  
signal that is out of range for the velocity  
pressure transducer input (during  
calibration:V < 40 mV orV > 420 mV,  
during operation: V < 40 mV or V > 0.75 V).  
Unoccupied Zone Heat Setpoint Failure  
Problem: The unoccupied zone heating  
setpoint input is out of range.  
U
Unit HI Communications Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost  
communication with the unit mounted  
(local) human interface (HI).  
Reason for Diagnostic: The input  
designated as unoccupied zone heating  
setpoint source is out of range (temp < 45  
F or temp > 94 F).  
UCM Reaction: The minimum airflow  
control function is disabled. The outside air  
damper minimum position function reverts  
to using the O/A flow compensation  
function if O/A flow compensation is  
enabled or to the default minimum position  
function if O/A flow compensation is  
disabled or not available.  
Check: Field/unit wiring between RTM  
hand local HI.  
UCM Reaction: The active unoccupied  
zone heating setpoint reverts to the  
default value.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the unit-mounted  
human interface.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the designated unoccupied  
zone heat setpoint input returns to its  
allowable range for 10 continuous  
seconds, or after the user defines a  
different, valid unoccupied zone heating  
setpoint selection source.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the designated space pressure  
transducer sends a signal within range for  
10 continuous seconds.  
UCM Reaction: A fail-safe function in the HI  
will cause the following sequence:  
a. disallow any interaction between the HI  
and the RTM (or any other modules),  
b. render all HI keystrokes ineffective  
c. cause the following message to display  
on the unit-mounted HI display: “Local  
HI communications loss. Check comm  
link wiring between modules.” If the unit  
has a remote HI option, then this  
VOM Communications Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost communication  
with the VCM.  
V
VCM Communication Failure  
Problem: The RTM has lost  
communication with the VCM.  
Check: Field/unit wiring between RTM and  
VCM.  
diagnostic will display as any other  
automatic reset diagnostic.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communications with the VOM.  
Verify: Check field/unit wiring between  
RTM and VCM.  
Reset Required: (INFO) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication is restored  
between the RTM and the HI. When the  
failure screen clears, the general display  
restores to allow the HI to interact with the  
RTM again.  
UCM Reaction:Ventilation override actions  
will not be allowed, and the VO Output  
relay will be deenergized.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the VCM.  
UCM Reaction: All active commands and  
setpoints provided by the VCM are  
canceled and/or ignored. A fail-safe  
function in the VCM will cause all outputs  
to deenergize and/or set to zero. The  
outside air damper minimum position  
function will revert to using the O/A flow  
compensation function if O/A flow  
compensation is enabled or set to the  
default minimum position function if O/A  
flow compensation is disabled or not  
available.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication has been  
restored.  
Unoccupied Zone Cool Setpoint Failure  
Problem: The unoccupied zone cooling  
setpoint input is out of range.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The input  
designated as the unoccupied zone cooling  
setpoint source is out of range (temp <  
45°F or temp > 94°F).  
W
WSM Communications Fail  
Problem: The RTM has lost communication  
with the WSM.  
Check: Field/unit wiring between RTM and  
WSM.  
UCM Reaction: The active unoccupied  
zone cooling setpoint reverts to the default  
value.  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after communication is restored.  
communications with the VOM.  
Reason for Diagnostic: The RTM has lost  
communication with the WSM.  
UCM Reaction: The UCM will react as if a  
freezestat has occurred by issuing:  
• An “all heat on” or “mod output full  
open” request to “heat control”  
Reset Required: (PAR) An automatic reset  
occurs after the designated unoccupied  
zone cool setpoint input returns to its  
allowable range for 10 continuous  
seconds, or after the user defines a  
Velocity Pressure Sensor Failure  
Problem: The velocity pressure input  
signal is out of range.  
112  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
diagnostics  
2. continuously for five minutes while:  
·water side economizer is open 100%,  
· presetting of a head pressure valve, or  
· demand for mechanical cooling.  
Unit must be: a. configured with water  
cooled condenser and/or water  
economizer and b. have water flow  
switch installed.  
c.Time to React: immediate  
• A “fan off” request to “supply fan  
control”  
• A “close damper” request to  
“economizer actuator control”  
• The water pump to turn on and position  
all water valves to provide maximum  
flow through all water source heat  
exchangers  
• Disables preheat function if WSM mixed  
air temp sensor is selected as preheat  
sensor  
e. Actions to be Initiated: A “lockout all  
ckts” request is issued to the  
“compressor staging function”  
f. Reset: An automatic reset occurs after  
the water flow input returns to within  
range continuously for 3 seconds, the  
water pump is requested OFF, or the  
water flow switch becomes not installed.  
Reset Required: An automatic reset  
occurs after one complete set of IPC  
packets is received.  
WSM Mixed AirTemp Sensor Fail  
b. Activation Conditions: temperature <  
-50°F or temperature > 209°F, and sensor  
is selected for use by “waterside  
economizer temperature enable  
Z
Zone Cool Setpoint Failure  
Problem: The occupied zone cooling  
setpoint is out of range.  
function” or “preheat function”  
c.Time to React: 10 sec <T < 20 sec  
e. Actions to be Initiated: “waterside  
economizer temperature enable  
Reason for Diagnostic: The input  
designated as occupied zone cooling  
setpoint source is out of range (temp. <  
45°F or temp > 94°F).  
function” uses supply air cooling setpoint  
instead of mixed air temperature. If xixed  
air temperature is used for “preheat  
function”, issue a “disable” request to  
“preheat function”.  
f. Reset: An automatic reset occurs after  
the mixed air temp. input returns to  
within range continuously for 10 seconds.  
UCM Reaction: The active occupied zone  
cooling setpoint reverts to the default  
occupied zone cooling setpoint.  
Reset Required: (PAR) an automatic reset  
occurs after the designated occupied  
zone CSP input returns to its allowable  
range for 10 continuous seconds, or after  
a different valid occupied zone CSP  
selection source is user-defined.  
Water Flow Fail  
a. Data used (module,packet,byte,bit):  
WSM, 01,19, 05  
b. Activation Conditions: The water flow  
input is detected open ;  
1. at the end of precool water flow  
initiation state, or  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Literature Order Number  
Date  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN  
March 2008  
Supersedes  
SCXG-SVX01B-EN July 2000  
www.trane.com  
For more information, contact your localTrane  
office or e-mail us at [email protected]  
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change  
design and specifications without notice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Terraillon Building Set TPRO6300 User Manual
Toastmaster Bread Maker TBR20HCAN User Manual
TomTom GPS Receiver XL330 User Manual
Vantec Network Card LPC 420 User Manual
Vantec Network Card UGT CR920 User Manual
ViewSonic Marine Instruments VS11895 User Manual
Vivitek Projector D751ST User Manual
Vulcan Hart Range EG160 User Manual
Waterpik Technologies Swimming Pool Vacuum H0555100 User Manual
Weber Gas Grill 43146 User Manual